Service Manual AM700 Audio Measurement Set 070-9055-00 Warning The servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To avoid personal injury, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so. Refer to the Safety Summary prior to performing service.
Copyright © Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved. Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved. Printed in the U.S.A. Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 1000, Wilsonville, OR 97070–1000 TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.
WARRANTY Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any such product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product.
Service Assurance If you have not already purchased Service Assurance for this product, you may do so at any time during the product’s warranty period. Service Assurance provides Repair Protection and Calibration Services to meet your needs. Repair Protection extends priority repair services beyond the product’s warranty period; you may purchase up to three years of Repair Protection.
Table of Contents General Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix xxi xxiii Key Features of the AM700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Picture Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply (A12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM700 Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Programmable Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Simulation Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unity Gain Output Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Receiver Input (diagram 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Main/CPU Board (A6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPU and DSP Bus Interface (diagram 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPU Board Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Clock Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample Receivers (diagram 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A Memory (diagram 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B Memory (diagram 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSP/CPU Interface ASIC (diagram 6) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents LCD Flat Panel Display (A14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCD Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCD Backlight Inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82 3–82 3–82 Performance Verification Test Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Check Static Phase Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Phase Jitter (Jitter spectrum flatness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Jitter Spectrum Noise Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Peak-to-Peak Jitter Measurement Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Eye Diagram Residual Jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Mechanical Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set up the AM700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the Phase-Locked Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the Digital Generator Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Cover Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument Cover Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Removal/Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Major Assembly Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Appendix Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPU/DSP Interface Address Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAM Address Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic LED Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 2–1: Rear panel fuse, power connector, On/Off Switch, and line selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2–2: Touch screen interface with main menu and submenu displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2–3: Representative icons and arrows seen in the display . . . . . . . Figure 2–4: Application selection menu under the other button . . . . .
Table of Contents Figure 3–7: Digital audio receiver simplified block diagram . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3–8: Digital audio connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3–9: Digital signal processor port connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3–10: DSP port timing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3–11: Analog generator simplified block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3–12: Analog generator DSP section block diagram . . .
Table of Contents Figure 4–21: Storage manager control screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4–22: AM700 startup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4–23: Low level diagnostics menu V1.02 firmware . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4–24: Low level diagnostic OVERALL RUN MODE menu . . . . Figure 4–25: Build CUSTOM TEST SEQUENCE menu for disk drive test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Figure 6–19: Circuit board assemblies for CRT display version . . . . . . . Figure 6–20: Circuit board assemblies for flat panel color display . . . . . Figure 6–21: Multiple-pin connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6–22: Major module locations for the CRT display . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6–23: Major module locations for the LCD flat panel display . . . Figure 6–24: Bottom view showing the connections to the Analog Acquisition board . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Figure 6–51: Removing the plastic handle screw cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6–52: Removing the thumb release button from the swing arm . . Figure 6–53: Removing the retaining screws holding the swing arms to the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6–54: Installing and removing the AM700 Audio Measurement Set from the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents List of Tables xvi Table 1–1: Power cord identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1–2: Analog analyzer specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1–3: Electronic trigger specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1–4: Analog generator specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1–5: Digital audio unit specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Table 4–4: High bandwidth generator checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4–5: High resolution analyzer checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4–6: High bandwidth analyzer checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4–7: Main output and XLR output test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4–8: BNC output and main output test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4–9: Phase Jitter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Table A-14: Board program register address: 13000000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-15: Timer registers and addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-16: Interrupt inputs and sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-17: DUARTA register addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-18: DUARTB register addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-19: UART port B output port register . . . . . . . .
General Safety Summary Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it. To avoid potential hazards, use this product only as specified. Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures. To avoid potential hazards, use this product only as specified. To Avoid Fire or Personal Injury Use Proper Power Cord. Use only the power cord specified for this product and certified for the country of use. Use Proper Voltage Setting.
General Safety Summary Symbols and Terms Terms in this Manual. These terms may appear in this manual: WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life. CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property. Terms on the Product. These terms may appear on the product: DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking.
Service Safety Summary Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures. Read this Service Safety Summary and the General Safety Summary before performing any service procedures. Do Not Service Alone. Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present. Disconnect Power. To avoid electric shock, disconnect the main power by means of the power cord or, if provided, the power switch.
Service Safety xxii AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Preface This AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual is intended for use by qualified service personnel as a tool for troubleshooting, repair, and understanding of the AM700. No servicing of circuit boards should be attempted during the Warranty period of the instrument. Repair of the instrument when a defective circuit board is determined to be the cause of a failure is by board exchange. Both the CRT display and the flat-panel color display versions of the AM700 are covered in this service manual.
Preface Verification Procedure Test procedures to verify the functional performance of the AM700 are found in this section. A list of test equipment needed to perform the procedures precedes the test procedures. These verification procedures require test equipment and automated testing software that is not readily available to most service departments. Adjustment Procedure The adjustment procedures are shorter that the verification procedures.
Preface Diagrams Detailed block diagrams and circuit diagrams are found in this section. The block diagrams are provided to assist in determining board functions and functionality in the event of a circuit board failure. Schematic circuit diagrams are provided to assist in locating components and troubleshooting for circuit board repairs. Replaceable Mechanical Parts Part numbers for the replaceable mechanical parts and a mechanical exploded view of the AM700 are found in this section.
Preface xxvi AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications The Tektronix AM700 Audio Measurement System is a programmable highperformance, mixed signal audio analyzer designed for use in product design, characterization, quality control, manufacturing test, and servicing. It is also a valuable tool for monitoring and testing of signal distribution systems used in broadcasting and related applications.
Specifications portability. The standard accessory front cover provides extra protection to the face of the AM700 when used as a portable instrument or when stored. The AM700 may also be rackmounted in a standard 19-inch rack using the optional rackmounting accessory kit. Options The following options are available for use with the AM700: H Options A1 through A5 substitute an appropriate power cord for the country of use (see Table 1–1).
Specifications User-supplied Accessories H Standard VGA monitor (for viewing the AM700 display in color) H Ariel digital microphone (for direct audio input to the DSP input port) H XLR interconnection audio cables H BNC to XLR adapters H RCA Phono to XLR adapters H AT compatible keyboard Power Cord Options Table 1–1: Power cord identification Plug configuration AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual Normal usage Option number North America 125 V/15A Plug NEMA 5-15P Standard Europe 230
Specifications Characteristics The performance limits in this specification are valid with the following conditions: H This instrument must have been calibrated/adjusted at an ambient temperature between +20° C and +30° C. H The instrument must be in an environment with temperature, altitude, humidity, and vibration within the operating limits described in Table 1–15 on page 1–24. H The instrument must have had a warm-up period of at least 20 minutes.
Specifications Table 1–2: Analog analyzer specifications (cont.) Capabilities Description Input characteristics Maximum Resolution 96 dB below 62.5 mV = 0.9875 mV Maximum Useable Bandwidth High Bandwidth Mode 80 kHz High Resolution Mode 24 kHz Common-Mode Rejection At 50 or 60 Hz ≥50 dB At 1 kHz ≥50 dB. Typically 80 dB on +8 dBu scale, 60 dB on +14 dBu and up, and typically > 80 dB on less than +8 dBu scale At 10 kHz ≥45 dB.
Specifications Table 1–2: Analog analyzer specifications (cont.) Capabilities Description Input characteristics Channel Separation (High Resolution Mode) This is a measurement of the level of the driven channel with respect to the undriven channel with a bandpass filter centered on the driven channel frequency. The measurement is primarily noise-limited, therefore, measured values improve as input amplitude increases.
Specifications Table 1–2: Analog analyzer specifications (cont.) Capabilities Description Amplitude measurement Amplitude Accuracy at CAL Frequency +8 dBu FS ±0.1 dB at 120 Hz Other gain steps FS ±0.15 dB at 120 Hz Amplitude Accuracy (relative to Accuracy at CAL Frequency) (High Resolution Mode) 10 Hz to 20 kHz Inputs >1 mV (–57.8dBu) to10mV (–37.8dBu) ±1.0 dB Input >10 mV (–37.8 dBu) to 1.946 V (+8 dBu) ±0.1 dB, typically ±0.05 dB, 50 Hz to 10 kHz Input >1.
Specifications Table 1–2: Analog analyzer specifications (cont.) Capabilities Description Amplitude measurement High Bandwidth Mode 10 Hz to 20 kHz 20 to 70 kHz 70 to 80 kHz At +8 dBu FS ±0.2 dB (Typically ±0.05 dB from 50 Hz to 10 kHz ±0.35 dB ±1.0 dB At other gain steps FS ≥62.5 mV (–22 dBu) ±0.25 dB ±0.35 dB ±1.0 dB The accuracy of the measurement may be noise-limited for amplitudes below 62.5 mV (–22 dBu).
Specifications Table 1–2: Analog analyzer specifications (cont.) Capabilities Description THD + N measurement On –4 dBu Input Range At Full Scale At Full Scale –6 dB 400 Hz to 6.6 kHz ≤0.003% ≤0.006% 100 Hz to <400 Hz ≤0.0075% ≤0.006% 20 Hz to <100 Hz ≤0.0125% ≤0.0075% 400 Hz to 6.6 kHz ≤0.005% ≤0.010% 100 Hz to <400 Hz ≤0.0075% ≤0.010% 20 Hz to <100 Hz ≤0.015% ≤0.
Specifications Table 1–4: Analog generator specifications Capabilities Description Output characteristics Number of Output Channels Two, labeled A and B Signal Format Switchable between balanced and unbalanced. Source Impedance Selectable between: 600 W, 150 W, and 10 W. Minimum Typical Maximum 600 W 594 600 608 150 W 148.5 150 155 10 W (nominal) 9.5 11.8 13.5 A user-defined impedance may be used in place of either the 600 W or the 150 W source impedance.
Specifications Table 1–4: Analog generator specifications (cont.) Capabilities Description Frequency related characteristics Sine Wave Frequency Accuracy ±0.01% Interchannel Phase Difference These specifications apply only if generator channels are set to Follow A. When channels are not in follow, their relative phases are arbitrary.
Specifications Table 1–4: Analog generator specifications (cont.) Capabilities Description Amplitude related characteristics Amplitude Accuracy at 120 Hz, High Bandwidth Generator At +13.9 dBu ±0.15 dB, typically 0.1 dB –16.1 dBu to +30 dBu 0.15 dB, typically 0.1 dB –34.1 dBu to <–16.1 dBu 0.15 dB, typically 0.1 dB –52.1 dBu to <–34.1 dBu ±0.25 dB Amplitude Flatness, High Resolution Generator Relative to 120 Hz Levels from –22.1 dBu to +30 dBu Normal Mode 10 Hz to 10 kHz ±0.
Specifications Table 1–4: Analog generator specifications (cont.) Capabilities Description Amplitude related characteristics Low Distortion Mode 10 Hz to 1 kHz ±0.5 dB >1 kHz to 10 kHz ±1.0 dB High Bandwidth Generator 11.7 Hz to 20 kHz ±0.2 dB >20 kHz to 70 kHz ±1.0 dB >70 kHz to 80 kHz ±1.0 dB THD + N High Resolution Generator Residual THD + N (Normal Mode) Measurements over 80 kHz BW are noise limited below –4 dBu. Measurements over 22 kHz BW are noise limited below –10 dBu.
Specifications Table 1–4: Analog generator specifications (cont.) Capabilities Description THD + N 750 Hz to 7.3 kHz Amplitudes ≥+8 dBu ≤0.005% (–86 dB) Amplitudes ≥0 dBu ≤0.005% (–86 dB), typ. ≤ 0.003% (–90.5 dB) Amplitudes ≥–4 dBu ≤0.005% (–86 dB) Amplitudes ≥–10 dBu ≤0.005% (–86 dB) Amplitudes ≥–16 dBu ≤0.0075% (–82.5 dB) ≤0.0075% (–82.5 dB) High Bandwidth Generator Residual THD+N Residual THD+N of the high bandwidth generator. Load resistance ≥ 600 W outputs ≥–4.
Specifications Table 1–5: Digital audio unit specifications (cont.) Capabilities DSP Description 15-pin D, TTL/CMOS compatible. Pinout is compatible with Ariel Digital Microphone. Input and Output Impedances Digital In, Digital Out, Digital Reference In, Digital Reference Out 110 W ±10%, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz Unbalanced In, Unbalanced Out 75 W ±5%, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz Input and output levels AES/EBU I/O Levels Input levels required for normal operation and the output levels available.
Specifications Table 1–5: Digital audio unit specifications (cont.) Capabilities Description Receiver interface parameter measurements Input Equalization The Main Input includes automatic line equalization to measure and correct roll-off due to typical 110 W digital audio cable. Range 0 to 20 dB loss at 10 MHz Accuracy ±2 dB Static Phase Difference This is the phase difference between the selected main input and the reference input.
Specifications Table 1–5: Digital audio unit specifications (cont.) Capabilities Description Receiver interface parameter measurements Phase Jitter This is the jitter amplitude in unit intervals (UI) as a function of jitter frequency. Range 10 UI p-p from 20 Hz to 500 Hz, decreasing proportionally to 0.5 UI p-p from 10 kHz to 50 kHz. Accuracy For sinusoidal jitter greater than –20 dBUI (0.1 UI p-p) at jitter gain = 1, or greater than –40 dBUI (0.01 UI p-p) at jitter gain = 8.
Specifications Table 1–5: Digital audio unit specifications (cont.) Capabilities Description Generator variable parameters Static Phase Difference This is the phase difference between the generator output and the selected reference (input or output). The primary function of the measurement is to check compliance with AES11-1991 section 5.3. Range –64 to 63.5 UI (Unit Intervals) Resolution 0.
Specifications Table 1–5: Digital audio unit specifications (cont.) Capabilities Description Reference output variable parameters Clock Rate Range The reference output can be driven from the same clock that drives the main output, in which case the specifications of the main clock apply. Alternately, the reference output can be timed from the internal 48 kHz clock, or from the clock applied to the Digital Reference In connector. Clock Rate Accuracy Same as Internal clock rate accuracy.
Specifications Table 1–6: Display system specifications (cont.) Capabilities Description VGA output Resolution 640 × 480 VGA Signal Levels Level Voltage White Level Black Level Blanking Horizontal Sync Vertical Sync 0.7 V 0V 0V TTL, low true TTL, low true Signal Load Impedance Red Green Blue Horizontal Sync Vertical Sync 75 ohms 75 ohms 75 ohms TTL compatible TTL compatible Signal Time/Frequency Dot Clock Horizontal Rate Vertical Rate 25.175 MHz 31.469 kHz 59.
Specifications Table 1–7: Nonvolatile memory Capabilities Description Battery-backed SRAM Storage Capacity 1 Mbyte Retention Time (The length of time that stored waveforms and setups are retained without power to the instrument) Internal batteries, installed at the time of manufacture, have a life of greater than 10 years when operated and stored at an ambient temperature from 0_ C to 50_ C. Retention time of the nonvolatile memories is equal to the remaining life of the batteries.
Specifications Table 1–10: Front panel hardware Capabilities Description Analog Audio Standard XLR female.
Specifications Table 1–12: Power distribution system Capabilities Description AC power source Source Voltage Low Range (115 V nominal) 90 to 132 VACRMS High Range (230 V nominal) 180 to 253 VACRMS Source Frequency 50 or 60 Hz Fuse Rating Low Range 4 A, 3AG, slow-blow High Range 2 A, 3AG, slow-blow Power Consumption Maximum 185 watts (240 VA) Typical 180 watts Table 1–13: Safety standards Capabilities Description U.S. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listing ANSI/ISA S82.
Specifications Table 1–14: Safety standards compliance (cont.) Capabilities Description Overvoltage Category Mains – Overvoltage Category II (as defined in IEC 1010-1, Annex J) Analog Input – Overvoltage Category I Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2 (as defined in IEC 1010-1) Note – Rated for indoor use only Table 1–15: Environmental characteristics Capabilities Description Atmospherics Temperature Operating –10_ C to +50_ C, Class 5 Nonoperating (storage) –51_ C to +71_ C.
Specifications Table 1–16: Dynamic characteristics (cont.) Capabilities Description Shock Loose Load Vibration 1 inch p-p sinusoidal at approximately 4.5 Hz with at least 1/16 inch peak separation between the packaged product and the surface. Thirty minutes in normal shipping orientation, 30 minutes split between other possible shipping orientations. Vehicle Vibration 1.33 gRMS, random vibration, from 5 to 500 Hz, 60 minutes on each axis.
Specifications Table 1–17: Electromagnetic compatibility (cont.) Capabilities Description EMC requirements Immunity, Fast Transients, Common Mode IEC 801-4 1988 No loss of stored data, change to control settings, degradation of performance, or temporary loss of function will occur when the instrument is subjected to transients as described below. FCC Port Peak (kV) Tr/Th (ns) Rep Frequency (kHz) Signal & Control 0.5 5/50 5 DC Power 0.5 5/50 5 AC Power 1.
Specifications Table 1–18: Mechanical characteristics (cont.) Capabilities Description Standard instrument Overall Dimensions Height (with feet installed) Without Optional Front Cover 7.7 in (195.6 mm) With the Optional Front Cover 8.0 in (203.2 mm) Width Without the Handle 16.6 in (422 mm) With Handle 18.2 in (462.3 mm) Depth Instrument Alone 18.8 in (477.5 mm) With Optional Front Cover 19.0 in (482.
Specifications Table 1–19: Remote control protocol Capabilities Description Remote Control Protocol SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) 1994 External Keyboard Keyboard Operation The external keyboard is used to enter text and numbers into those portions of the user interface that accept such input. The front-panel keypad may also be used for numeric entry.
Specifications Table 1–20: Generator control (cont.) Capabilities Description Time-Dependent Signals Simple user-defined audio sweeps and tone sequences are permitted. The sweep feature permits sweeping frequency and amplitude separately, or both simultaneously if necessary. The sweep test signal is a set of discrete test frequencies, not a linear sweep of frequencies from start to stop. Digital Signal Generation Digital signal generation is similar to analog signal generation.
Specifications Table 1–21: Generator signals Capabilities Description Generated signals Sine A single sine-wave tone with variable amplitude and frequency. The amplitude or frequency or both may be swept or stepped to provide a wide range of sinusoidal test signals.
Specifications Table 1–21: Generator signals (cont.) Capabilities Description Generated signals Multitone A multitone test signal with variable amplitude. This signal consists of multiple simultaneously generated sine waves. The multitone may be specified in either of two ways: file mode or list mode. File Mode: A user-provided file contains the description (frequency and amplitude) of each tone included in the multitone signal and the buffer size to use for the fft-based generation of the multitone.
Specifications Table 1–22: Audio analyzer application (cont.) Capabilities Description Analysis modes Major Acquisition Modes An acquisition may take one of the following forms: Automatic Whenever trigger conditions are met, and the measurement can be made, a new reading is taken. Track Generator Sweeps Acquisition does not occur except when the internal generator is producing a sweep. Automatic sweep detection will be present for detecting the beginning of sweeps.
Specifications Table 1–22: Audio analyzer application (cont.) Capabilities Description Filters This application gives the user a choice of several predefined filters.
Specifications Table 1–23: FFT analyzer (cont.) Capabilities Description Frequency related characteristics Span (the bandwidth of the displayed data) (cont.) Input Sampling rate Width Zoom factor AES 32 kHz 133.438 266.875 533.75 667.187 1334.38 2668.75 3335.94 6671.82 13343.8 100 50 25 20 10 5 4 2 1 (full) Measurement Range High Resolution Mode DC to 20 kHz High Bandwidth Mode DC to 80 kHz Displayed Bins Zoomed 16 Unzoomed 428 Bin Width 0.781 Hz (min. span) to 156.3 Hz (max.
Specifications Table 1–23: FFT analyzer (cont.
Specifications Table 1–23: FFT analyzer (cont.) Capabilities Description Multitone Multitone Record Size 16 Kbytes or less for detecting multitones Multitone Detection Each channel may be set to recognize one multitone, which can either be the current tone in one of the generator channels or a multitone described in a file. Files are provided in the AM700 file system that contain multitone specifications for the Tektronix ASG 100/140 audio generators.
Specifications Table 1–24: Audio monitor (cont.) Capabilities Description Oscilloscope display Display Appearance The display is similar to the ones used in the VM700A audio option. Both channels may be overlaid or put in a ‘split window’ mode. Touch-and-zoom affects both channels in a window, and graticules track their signals.
Specifications Table 1–24: Audio monitor (cont.) Capabilities Description Listen capability LISTEN A user can listen to input channels. Table 1–25: Digital interface tester Capabilities Description Intended Use The digital interface tester application is used to monitor and troubleshoot the digital audio interface. It allows you to view incoming data streams at the logical (bit), or electrical interface level, and to create special signals to probe the interface.
Specifications Table 1–25: Digital interface tester (cont.) Capabilities Description Jitter Spectrum Displays the energy spectrum of the jitter on the digital main input signal. Like FFT, this spectrum can be viewed as an interpolated graph, a bar graph, or a spectrogram. Averaging is available (exponential averaging, min hold, and max hold) in the jitter spectrum display. Averaging is not available in the other displays.
Specifications 1–40 AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Operating Information This section provides the installation information needed for the AM700 Audio Measurement Set and the basic operating information that a service person might need to check for proper operations of the instrument. Power Requirements and Power On The AM700 operates with line frequencies of 50 or 60 Hz over two line voltage ranges. The nominal setting of the low voltage range is 115 VAC. The nominal setting of the high voltage range is 230 VAC.
Operating Information Changing Line Voltage Range and Fuse The voltage range selection switch and fuse holder are located in the lower left corner of the AM700 rear panel (see Figure 2–1). The AM700 is shipped from the factory set for the operating voltage of the destination nation (115 VAC or 230 VAC). If the setting is not correct, it must be changed before connecting the power cord to the power source. 1. Turn off the rear-panel power switch and disconnect the power cord from the mains supply. 2.
Operating Information tion, the grounding connection must be made before making connections to the instrument input or output terminals. Power-on Procedure Starting with Version 1.02 firmware, the power-up diagnostics are normally bypassed, and the measurement set initializes with the FFT application running. You can start an application other than FFT by pressing and holding in the front-panel button for the application you want to start as you turn on the front panel power switch.
Operating Information 1. When pressed and immediately released, each of these buttons performs a default action (turning on or off the specified feature). 2. When any of these buttons is pressed and held for one second or more, a configuration menu related to its operation is displayed. NOTE. The button default action (selected when you press and release the front-panel button) does not occur when exiting a press/hold menu. Instead, you must again press and release the button to perform the default action.
Operating Information During operation of the AM700 the following objects may appear on the screen: Display Icons H One to four measurement view windows H Generator Status area H Generator Control Panel H Menu and Soft Keys selections H Operational status and Real Time measurement displays H Notifier messages The AM700 uses icons in its menus and control panels to represent actions or available choices. Some of these icons are displayed in Figure 2–3.
Operating Information Calibrating the Touch Screen The measurement set is shipped from the factory with its touch screen fully calibrated. Although it will seldom be necessary, the touch screen can easily be recalibrated. To calibrate the touch screen: H Press the front-panel button labeled Other. H Use the large control knob to scroll through the menu choices and select the touch screen calibration choice from the menu that appears (see Figure 2–4). Press Enter on the keypad to activate the selection.
Operating Information After calibration, the screen will display the Paint screen. You can test areas of the screen for activity by touching the screen at various points. The touch point will become highlighted. The Clear soft key on the touch screen erases the highlighted areas of the Paint screen. Press any application front-panel button to exit the paint screen and start the application.
Operating Information 2. Touch the System Setup selection to display the setup menu choices. Setting the clock is the default selection, and the clock face appears as seen in Figure 2–6. 3. Check the date and time settings. If any are not correct, they may be selected and adjusted to the correct setting. A selected choice changes intensity to show that editing of that setting is active. Figure 2–6: AM700 Audio Measurement Set system clock 4.
Operating Information Backup Battery The nonvolatile memory of the AM700 is maintained by an internal backup battery. Stored data will be retained for the life of the battery. A fresh battery installed at the factory has a life of greater than 10 years when operated and stored at an ambient temperature between 0° C and 50° C. NOTE. The backup battery used to retain stored data has an operating life of greater than 10 years when operating between 0° and 50° C.
Operating Information Configuration Press the Configuration button (shown in Figure 2–8) to display the Configuration options menu. There are seven selection choices displayed in the Configuration menu shown in Figure 2–9. The summary of the configuration choices is followed by a more detailed explanation of the configuration menus for operation of the AM700.
Operating Information Configuration Summary Quick Setup. Touch this soft key to display a menu of template selections. These selections save time by providing one-touch instrument configuration for some common AM700 measurements. See Quick Setup at the end of this section for information on the quick setup templates and the measurements that are available with the quick setups. Input Selection. Touch this soft key to display the Input Configuration menu.
Operating Information another application is started prior to power off. State Save does not return the application that was running at power off when power is again turned on, but the user selections for an application that were saved will be restored. Also, refer to the Save AM700 State function discussion in the AM700 Audio Measurement Set User Manual. The Save AM700 State function generates new functions that store customized application setups.
Operating Information Figure 2–11: Input selection control panel Analog Input Connections. Touch the select soft key associated with the Analog A and Analog B input connections to toggle between the front-panel XLR connector and the internal Generator routing. The front-panel XLR inputs are the default choice for signal input to the AM700. Selecting the internal generator routing permits testing of the generator/analyzer pair without using interconnecting cables. Input Impedance.
Operating Information Input Range and Auto. The gain range for the analog inputs defaults to Auto enabled to provide auto ranging on the applied signal. This avoids possible overloading of the A/D converters and is the recommended setting for normal operation. When you know the amplitude of the signal being measured, you may choose to make a manual gain setting. Follow these steps when changing the input range setting: 1. Turn off the Auto enabling (check goes away) by touching the Auto soft key. 2.
Operating Information When finished making your selections, press Clear Menu to exit the Input Selections menu. Touch the measurement channel soft key to display the pull-down menu. Pull-down Input Selection Menu. Use the large knob to move the selection box to the signal you want. Touch the measurement channel soft key a second time to assign the input to the channel and clear the pull-down menu. Use the quick select soft keys to set both channels to the same generator type.
Operating Information Figure 2–13: A typical view setup control menu To select a view type and define the view options: 1. Press the Configure button and touch the View Setup soft key to enter the View Setup menu. 2. Select the desired view type by touching the icon on the display. 3. If desired, touch the View Options icon to display available options for the view you have selected. 4. Select the desired view options (a checked box indicates that an option is selected). 5.
Operating Information View Types. The View Types column in the figure shows the icons for these view types. Each view may be a different view type. Selecting a particular view type of a view is done by first selecting the view you wish to change in the View Selection bar. Only the selected view is affected by a change in the choices. The Measurement column shows the measurement types that are available for viewing in a view window.
Operating Information The choices in the Axes column allow the linear/log selection for the x- and y-axes and a choice of Dual Y Axis. Dual Y-Axis displays are permitted when more than one trace is displayed in a single view. In Dual Y-Axis displays, the vertical or y-axis scale of the front trace is seen on the left side of the graticule and y-axis scale for the back trace is seen on the right side of the graticule. Other axes choices are determined by the view type.
Operating Information Measurement Setup Menu The Measurement Setup menu permits AM700 users to define which measurements are to be performed and displayed by the current application. An example of setting up different measurements in the four measurement views of Audio Analyzer is shown in Figure 2–15. Figure 2–16 shows the FFT and Multitone Measurement Setup controls. See the specific application in Section 4 for information on setting up the measurements for the applications.
Operating Information FFT Configure Measurements FFT Multitone Configure Measurements Figure 2–16: Configure measurement screens for FFT Analyzer for FFT and for multitone 2–20 AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Operating Information System Setup Menu The System Setup menu is used to set the system clock, the serial and GPIB communication parameters, the hard copy output format, run the AM700 calibration routine, and set the input, output, and dBFS conversion factors. System Copy. The control screen display for setting the Copy parameters is reached either through the Configure System Setup menu or directly by pressing and holding the Copy front-panel button to bring up the same menu.
Operating Information After setting copy options, touch the Accept Changes soft key to save your selections, exit the Copy Configuration screen, and return to the measurement display. To delete all copies from the spooler, press and hold the copy button to display the Copy Configuration menu. Touch the Cancel Pending Hardcopy soft key to delete all the spooled hard copies. Screen dumps print when you press the Copy button. The image currently on the screen is printed.
Operating Information Figure 2–18: Hard copy output file selector Copy Styles. Sets the choice of the color output for PostScript and TIFF formatted files. When set to Color, printer output will be color formatted. If a copy format other than PostScript or TIFF is used, the Color state is ignored, and the file is output as monochrome (gray scale) only.
Operating Information Figure 2–19: Configure system setup communicate menu System Calibration Menu The Calibrate menu provides a soft key to start calibration. Calibration of the analog acquisition system is done after touching the Calibrate Now soft key. Offset changes that occur with temperature will be removed. If operating the AM700 in conditions that permit large ambient temperature changes, a calibration of the analog system improves the accuracy of the measurements.
Operating Information NOTE. Calibrate does not perform an analog acquisition system calibration when Digital Interface Tester is the running application. System Conversion Standards Menu The Conversion Standards menu shown in Figure 2–20 permits you to define certain values to be used in deriving measurement results. Output dBm. This setting defines the value of the external load resistor.
Operating Information When the generator is driving an output load of 600 W, and the internal series resistor is also set for 600 W, the generator dBm reading will be correct. This also true when driving a 150 W load with the internal 150 W series resistor selected. Since half the voltage is dropped across the internal resistor and half across the external resistor, the dBu (voltage across the load) output will be 6 dBu down from the output value in dBm for these matching conditions.
Operating Information Digital Audio Sampling Rate. In certain situations, the actual sample rate of a digital audio signal may differ from the value contained in the channel status bits. When digital audio is a source of input signals, the frequency measurements of the AM700 can be referred to the actual sample rate or the sample rate obtained from the channel status byte.
Operating Information Quick Setup One of the configuration choices is the Quick Setup selection. Under this selection is a set of application specific setups that can be used to quickly make the needed instrument configuration changes for an often used measurement setup. Figure 2–23 shows the selection screen with the Audio Analyzer selections; Table 2–1 gives the application-specific choices and the views that the selection produces.
Operating Information Table 2–1: Quick setups by application (cont.) Application Measurements Views displayed (views available but not displayed) FFT Analyzer FFT Analysis FFT1: Channel 1 FFT2: Channel 2 Multitone Level Measurements Meas1: Level Ch1 Meas2: Level Ch2 Meas3: Level Diff Ch1 –> Ch2 Digital Interface Tester View Enables Jitter Spectrum Eye Height Bit Activity Channel Status Audio Analyzer THD and THD+N Meas1: Ch1 THD+N versus Frequency Meas2: Ch2 THD+N vs. Freq. (Meas3: Ch1 THD vs.
Operating Information 2–30 AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation Digital Audio Rear Panel Digital Audio In Out In AES Ref Out Optical In Out In Unbal DSP Digital Out A3 Sample Analog Acquisition Sample XLR CH A Audio In A1 CH B Analog Control Port CH A CH B Serializer Audio Generator Audio Out A2 DSP A5 A7 DMA Remote DMA Front Panel Keyboard 4–Wire Interface COM 2 Rear Panel Host Interface Main/CPU PC Keyboard Interface At Keyboard (optional) Option Board Sound Headphones A8 A9 Touch Screen CRT GPIB GPIB Touch Panel
Theory of Operation Block Circuit Description A simplified board-level block diagram of the AM700 is shown in Figure 3–1. Only the main signal paths are shown. More detailed block diagrams of the circuitry are shown with the detailed circuit descriptions and in the diagrams section of this manual. CPU The CPU (central processing unit) controls the operation of the AM700 using the programming contained in the flash EPROM (electrically programmable read-only memory).
Theory of Operation Audio Generator There are two analog generators: High Resolution and High Bandwidth. Each generator has two channels of output. The High Resolution generator output channels are independent (output completely different signals on either channel). The High Bandwidth Generator outputs the same signal on both channels. There also two digital audio generators: AES/EBU and the DSP (digital signal processor).
Theory of Operation rectifier acts as a full-wave bridge rectifier; for 115 V operation, the primary rectifier is configured as a full-wave voltage doubler. The primary bridge rectifier is protected by the mains line fuse and surge suppressors. A mains line filter at the input of the power supply reduces conducted and radiated EMI from and to the AM700.
Theory of Operation Schematic diagrams are numbered sequentially by circuit board, for example, A5 diagram 3 and A6 diagram 3. Analog Acquisition Board (A1A1) Analog audio signals applied to the CHA and CHB XLR connectors are digitized for application to the DSP for processing.
Theory of Operation EMI Filter XLR Input Input Attenuator CAL In Termination Select Differential Input Amplifier and Gain Select Underrange Overrange Protection Clamp To High Bandwidth A/D Tunable Notch Filter To High Resolution A/D Auto Range Figure 3–2: Simplified block diagram of one channel of the analog input circuitry Differential analog audio signals are applied to the front panel XLR connectors on the XLR board, A2 and passed to the CHA input through EMI filters.
Theory of Operation At the output of the Attenuator a clamp circuit across the two sides of the differential signal prevents the signal from exceeding + or –10 V. This clamp protects the Input Amplifier from the accidental application of excessive signal amplitudes that would damage it. If the autorange function is enabled, the attenuator will be switched to the appropriate range for the applied signal. Gain Selection.
Theory of Operation frequency. The notch has a Q of 2.7 and a depth of greater than 20 dB throughout its 20 kHz tuning range. Test points, TP11 for CHB and TP12 for CHA, are provided for viewing the signal at the output of the notch filter. Analog ground is available at TP10. A/D Converters (diagram 4) Channel A and Channel B of the High Resolution A/D Converter are identical in operation as are Channel A and Channel B of the High Bandwidth A/D Converter.
Theory of Operation Converter offset inputs. The high resolution A/D Converter also contains circuitry to measure and store DC offset and subtract that value form all readings. This offset value is updated each time a different measurement application is selected or when requested through the calibration menu. CH A HBW Low-Pass Filter High BW A/D Clamp CH B HBW R Data L Data Convert CLK R Offset L Offset Low-Pass Filter 12.
Theory of Operation 96 kHz, the roll off is better than 90 dB. A servo circuit following the filter (U122 and associated components), looks at the DC offset of the output and feeds back an offsetting signal to the filter. At the output of the filter, the DC offset is reduced to a few millivolts. High Bandwidth A/D Converter Decimating Filter In the High Bandwidth A/D Converters, the left and right signals are applied single-ended.
Theory of Operation bit is included as the LSB bit of the data. That bit is set high or low depending on the state of the output of the trigger circuitry.
Theory of Operation Calibration, Control Registers, Interface, and Power Supplies (diagram 6) Refer to schematic diagram 6 of the A1A1 circuit board for the following circuit description.
Theory of Operation loaded. That path permits a diagnostic routine to write serial data on the CONTROLAIN data line and read it back to determine if the control path is functioning correctly. The CAL BUSY signal tells the DSP that a calibration is in progress. TTL Trigger Input A TTL trigger signal input is applied to a Schmitt trigger device, U111D. The output of the Schmitt trigger is buffered by U121C.
Theory of Operation Digital Audio Board (A3) The information for the A3 digital audio board is provided in two manners. First is a discussion of the digital audio board functions as related to the user interface. The first discussion follows the functional operation of the board. The second part of the discussion more closely follows the schematic layout for the digital audio board.
Theory of Operation Frequency Offset XTAL 7 Select INT ACQ CLK Reference Generator AES IN 9 DARS IN 9 XLR (Rear) U88 U145 PRGM Gain U107,Q7,Q8 Encoder U108 Cable Simulator XLR (Front) BNC (Rear0 AMPL 0 – 9 AES3 Waveform Generator Received Reference Data 5 DSP Port (Rear) Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Received Audio Data Optical (Rear) Bit and Frame Clocks Phase Offset and Jitter Generator 2 4 Phase and Jitter Values VUCP, Block Start SSI,SCI DSP Serial Control RAM 1 1
Theory of Operation User Controlled Audio Data Parameters. The user can set the following software controlled audio data parameters for the digital signal generator: waveform, frequency, amplitude, audio sample rate, number of bits, dither, channel status, and user bits. Changes to these signal parameters involve no hardware beyond that required to communicate from the CPU to the Digital Audio Board.
Theory of Operation RAM_CE Address Decoder A(0 –15) Address RAM Control 1 D(0 – 23) 12.
Theory of Operation H Variable interface amplitude. Controls both the XLR and BNC output signal amplitude in a 5:1 XLR to BNC ratio. User Controlled Interface Parameters. The user can make the following parameter changes to control the generated digital audio interface signal. Control of these parameters depends on correct operation of specific hardware circuitry on the Digital Audio board. H Interface clock source selection. These selections are: Follow Audio, Variable, or Ref In.
Theory of Operation H Data formatter. The Data Formatter creates the start and stop bits for the serial data from the AES Decoder. These bits control the formatting of the serial data into parallel data bytes in the Sample Transmitter. H Sample transmitter. The sample transmitter arranges the serial data into eight-bit data bytes to be sent to the DSP circuit board.
Theory of Operation Digital Interface Tester Measurement Functions The digital audio board has circuitry that supports the following interface measurements. These are the qualities of the serial data waveform itself and not the coded audio data. H Amplitude. A DC level from the AGC circuit provides a measure of the input signal level. H Cable loss. A DC level from the auto equalization circuit provides a measure of the signal degradation (rolloff) caused by the transmission path.
Theory of Operation H Source Selection. A solid-state FET switch selects the source of the AES reference signal from either the AES Ref input or, when the main input selection is From Generator, the Reference output. H The decoded data is applied to the DSP through the Data Formatter and Sample Transmitter just as for the main audio signal. DSP Mode. The DSP Mode overrides the normal (AES) mode generator. Control of the main output is disabled.
Theory of Operation DSP RESET. At power up, the DSP is held in reset until the power and PLL has stabilized. The RESET input is a Schmitt trigger. When (DSPRST) is asserted (low), the DSP is initialized and placed into the reset state. The DSPRST signal is widespread throughout the Digital Audio board. Mode/(IRO) Lines. After the DSP leaves the reset state, the mode setting input pins are switched to interrupt request inputs (IRQA, IRQB, and NMI).
Theory of Operation Address Decoder DSP Clock Jitter Interrupt The DSP Address Decoder, U5, is a PAL device. It looks at nine selected DSP address lines and three of the Data and Address bus control pins, (DPS), (DDS), and X/Y, and decodes them to produce chip enable control signals: (RAM_CE), (SID_CE), (STX_CE), (PHASE_CE), (ENCJIT_CE), and (COUNT_CE). DSP RAM address lines RA15 and RA16 are also decoded here. A crystal clock circuit, Y1, supplies a 12.
Theory of Operation Phase Offset and Jitter Generator (diagram 4) Refer to schematic diagram 4 of the A3 Digital Audio circuit board for the following discussion. Jitter DAC The Jitter DAC, U103, converts a jitter data byte into an analog signal for insertion into the Phase-Locked Loop. The effect of the insertion produces a high speed phase modulation of the digital signal that carries the digitized audio information.
Theory of Operation Programmable Gain Digital signal gain is controlled using a programmable current source to a differential amplifier circuit formed by Q7 and Q8. The programmable current source DAC, U107, receives 10-bit wide word that is the digital value of the output current needed for the gain wanted. The converted signal is the current source for the differential amplifier. The output of the amplifier if fed through a 20 MHz low-pass filter to operational amplifier U72.
Theory of Operation Frequency Offset (diagram 7) The circuitry on this diagram allows tuning of the sample rate frequency. There are two synthesizers in series to produce a wide range of frequencies with fine resolution. The first synthesizer, U82, receives a clock frequency of approximately 8 to 12 MHz (12.228 MHz for a sample rate of 48 kHz). The synthesizer devices have a built in phase comparator.
Theory of Operation The decoupling capacitors associated with the +5 V power to the various devices on the Digital Audio board are also shown in this diagram. The +5 V power to this board is fused by F3, a 2 A fuse. All of the input power lines are provided with additional decoupling circuits (LC filters) near the power supply connector, J30. Decoders (diagram 9) The Decoder circuitry contain the Main and Reference Decoders, the AES Reference Generator, and the Timing Generator.
Theory of Operation Eye Sampler (diagram 11) The circuitry of the Eye Sampler is an equivalent time sampler used in the generation of the eye pattern and measurement of the jitter waveform. Either the incoming Eye Source or the phase error signal is selected for application to an A/D converter. The 8-bit parallel output of the A/D converter is applied to the Eye Sampler PAL where the equivalent time samples are chosen as 1 of 27 input samples.
Theory of Operation Rear Panel Board (A4) PUSH Figure 3–8: Digital audio connectors The Rear Panel board seen in Figure 3–8 is schematically shown in a single diagram (A4, diagram 1). All the digital audio rear panel connectors interface to a single 32 pin connector and cable to the Digital Audio board. AES REF Connectors The rear panel board provides the interconnections for the various methods of connecting digital signals in and out of the AM700.
Theory of Operation limited to about 150 mA. Digital devices requiring more power than available from these sources may be powered by an external power source. The DSP port timing diagram is shown in Figure 3–9. The external device determines the sampling rate. The sampling rate to the AM700 must be no greater than 48 kHz, and the data must be 16-bit. Bit and Frame Clocks must always be “clean,” with no extra transitions, while the AM700 is in DSP mode.
Theory of Operation Bit Clock Frame Sync Receive Data MSB, SF1 LSB, SF1 MSB, SF2 LSB, SF2 MSB, SF1 LSB, SF1 MSB, SF2 LSB, SF2 Transmit Data NOTE: All Data is sampled on the FALLING edge of Bit Clock. Receive Data and Frame Setup Time Before Falling Bit Clock Edge = 25 ns Receive Data and Frame Sync Hold Time After Falling Bit Clock Edge = 40 ns Signal Level –0.5 V to +5.
Theory of Operation Analog Generator Board (A5) A simplified block diagram of the analog generators is shown in Figure 3–11. The following block diagram description explains the blocks from a functional point of view. The schematic diagram description is given later. Block Diagram Description of the Analog Audio Generators There are two analog generators: High Resolution and High Bandwidth. The simplified block diagram is shown in Figure 3–11.
Theory of Operation +22 V From Power Supply +22 V –22 V +15 V –15 V +5 V Floating Power Supply –22 V 9 +5 V Serial Control Hi Res Opto-Iso. Opto-Iso. U9,U10 To CPU Host Bus To Generator Floating Circuits (The floating power supply in on the analog generator board in the CRT display instruments. It is on the power supply board in the flat-panel display instruments) Hi Res 8X Oversampling Hi BW Clocks Clocks 12.228 MHz 1 Sync and Delay Opto-Iso. U20,U21 Std BClk Opto-Iso. U94 Frame 12.
Theory of Operation In the flat panel display version of the AM700, two small relay boards are used to completely isolate the internal generator signal from the cable to the Acquisition board when it is not being sent to the acquisition. This reduces the generator-to-acquisition crosstalk to –140 dB or below. Earlier versions of the AM700 used a relay T-switch on the Acquisition board to shut off the signal when it was not needed.
Theory of Operation Digital Signal Processor (Generator) (diagram 1) Refer to schematic diagram 2 of the A5 analog generator circuit board for the following circuit description. CERAM A(0 –15) Address Decoder PAL Address Control RAM U5 D(0 – 23) 12.
Theory of Operation DSP The generator DSP, U4, develops the digital data that represents the audio test signal to output from the front panel Analog Generator XLR connectors. It is programmed by the host CPU via the host interface. The data is clocked out serially to the generator DACs through the SSI (synchronous serial interface) of the DSP. Reset and SSI Clock Pal The Reset and SSI Clock Pal, U7, allows the output data to be clocked either directly from the DSP or from a divided version of the 12.
Theory of Operation High Resolution SCK Disable Reset and SSI Clock BCLK SCK_DISABLE = Low To DAC Opto–Isolators PAL SCK To DSP U7 High Resolution Waveforms: SCK BCLK High Bandwidth SCK Disable SCK_DISABLE = High Reset and SSI Clock BCLK To DAC Opto–Isolators PAL SCK From DSP U7 High Bandwidth Waveforms: SCK BCLK Figure 3–13: S-Clock disable used for DSP mode control AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 3–37
Theory of Operation High Resolution mode SSI Clock Frame BCLK STD Channel A Data Channel B Data Channel A Data Channel B Data High Bandwidth mode SSI Clock Frame BCLK STD Figure 3–14: SSI clock, frame, B clock, and serial data waveform for High Res and High BW modes Control and I/O (diagram 2) Refer to schematic diagram 2 of the A5 analog generator circuit board for the following circuit description.
Theory of Operation Host Port Serial Control Register Communication between the CPU and DSP is done through the host port, J17. A bidirectional buffer, U86, isolates the CPU and DSP busses from each other and controls the direction of data transfer. The Serial Control Register receives control bits in a serial data stream from the Serial Control PAL. The register is composed of six, 8-bit serial input shift registers, for a total of 48 control signal outputs.
Theory of Operation Current to Voltage Converters The current output of the DACs is converted to a voltage level by the Current to Voltage (I-to-E) converter circuits, U19B on the left channel, and U13B on the right channel. The components on the minus inputs of the I-to-E converters filter conversion glitches from the DACs. The output voltage of these devices is applied to the DAC Low-Pass Filter circuitry for smoothing.
Theory of Operation Tunable Bandpass Filter The Tunable Bandpass Filter is designed to attenuate the second and third harmonic distortion products from the DACs to improve the already low distortion characteristics of the high resolution generator signals. Filters are tunable in two bands for improved noise characteristics. The bands of filter operation are from 20 Hz to 750 Hz and from 750 Hz to 10 kHz. The filters are constant-Q filters with a Q of 2.7.
Theory of Operation A and B Channel Buffers A Channel and B Channel signals from the stepped attenuators are applied to buffer amplifiers U27A (A Channel) and 28A (B Channel) to isolate the stepped attenuator stage from the output amplifiers and provide three gain ranges. The gain of these amplifiers is separately controlled by more 1-of-8 data selectors in the inverting input of the amplifiers (U29 in A Channel and U30 in B Channel).
Theory of Operation The second output is the Overload signal that is applied to the attenuator setting selector of the overloaded channel. This immediately adds a factor of 16 attenuation to protect the output amplifiers in that channel from damage. Output Impedance Selectors The output impedance selection for the audio analog generator is done with solid-state relays using control signal from the serial control register (diagram 2).
Theory of Operation [50 kHz +22 V A Gnd –16 V Figure 3–15: Switching waveform for –15 V floating power supply Main/CPU Board (A6) In the host CPU (simplified block diagram shown in Figure 3–16) there are two RS-232 ports, generator interface port, keyboard interface port, GPIB interface, free running counter, Host Interface, board registers, bus interface and memories for data and program storage.
Theory of Operation Memery Controller IRQ To DSP DMA and Host Interface CPU and DSP Bus Interface 3 NVRAM Flash EPROM EPROM 1 DRAM and Diagnostic Display Bus Arbitration and Interrupt Encoder Board Registers and Timer 6 5 3 4 System Clock and Resets, Counter and Address Decoder Option Board 2 A8 25 Interrupt Request Board Register Bits Bus Arbitration Control Signals RS232 Serial Interface GPIB I/O Processor 7 4–Wire Interface ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Latch Control Signal To Front Panel Board
Theory of Operation Interrupt Control Interrupts to the CPU are multiplexed with the reset levels by U65. The three interrupt lines provide an indication of an interrupt condition. The states of the interrupt signals provide an encoding of the interrupt level as seen in Table 3–1. While the RST040L line to U65 is low, the interrupt lines are connected to all low inputs. At power up, after the power on reset is removed, all the interrupts are enabled.
Theory of Operation System Clock and Resets, Counter, and Address Decoder (diagram 2) Refer to schematic diagram 2 of the A6 CPU board for the following discussion. System Clock Three clock drivers, U47, U49, and U135, generate the various 25 MHz clocks used throughout the CPU. These clock drivers are synchronized by the output of Y2, a 12 MHz oscillator. Reset The power supply reset signal (PWRDY) is ANDed with the +5 V voltage, and the RST line from U20 by AND-gate U59A.
Theory of Operation Circuit blocks affected by the power up reset or manual reset are: Manual System Reset Counter Address Decoder 3–48 H DRAM error detection outputs are masked during and after the reset is deasserted, H DRAM parity is set to even during and after the reset is deasserted, NVRAM is write protected during and after the reset is deasserted, H FEPROM is write protected during and after the reset is deasserted, H All interrupt signals (level 7 – level 1) are masked during and after
Theory of Operation Memory Controller, EPROM, FEPROM, and NVRAM (diagram 3) Refer to schematic diagram 3 of the A6 CPU board for the following discussion. EPROM The EPROM is a 32-bit wide device, and the maximum memory allowed on board is 1 Mbyte. This memory is where the system boot-up code is loaded. It is read only memory, and data transfer type can be byte, word, or long word. The EPROM Address space for the possible memory sizes is shown in Table A-4 in Appendix A.
Theory of Operation Battery Backup The +5 V source to the NVRAM is monitored by U57. A backup battery is used to maintain the stored memory of the NVRAM when the AM700 is powered off. That battery is monitored for a low voltage condition so that a low battery warning may be issued. When the battery is low, the NVBF interrupt is applied to the Interrupt Encoder. That is a level 7 interrupt, and while the instrument is running, it is masked to permit the CPU to maintain normal operation.
Theory of Operation Table 3–2: Diagnostic LED Definitions LED Display Register Watchdog Timer LED Description 0 reserved 1 reserved 2 on : Flash EPROM (bank 0) not found 3 on : Flash EPROM (bank 1) not found 4 on : Flash EPROM (bank 2) not found 5 on : DRAM not found 6 on : battery supply failure 7 on : hardware reset active This register is a write only octal latch which can be programmed to turn on or off the diagnostic 7-segment LED on the CPU board.
Theory of Operation Board Program Register (BPR) Board Code Register Real Time Clock This Register is composed of four 8-bit registers, U86, U88, U92, and U125. The register bit states indicate various board status and control various board operations on the HOST CPU side. Its contents can be written and read. A bit mapping of the registers with signal names and descriptions of bit values is given in Table A-14 in Appendix A. This register, U78, holds the switch settings of dip switch S2.
Theory of Operation Front Panel PAL Controlling signals for the operation of the Front Panel logic are produced by U106, a PAL (programmable array logic) device. Video ASIC and VRAM (diagram 8) Refer to schematic diagram 8 of the A6 CPU board for the following discussion. Video RAM The Video RAM is composed of four, 512 × 512, 8-bit memory devices, U117, U118, U119, and U120. Each memory has a 2 Mbit capacity, and the total memory provides for two pages of display.
Theory of Operation VRAMDAC and Floppy Drive Interface (diagram 9) Refer to schematic diagram 9 of the A6 CPU board for the following discussion. Video RAM/DAC There are two identical Video RAM/DAC devices, U37 and U15. One, U37, produces the monochrome drive to the internal display monitor. The second, U15, provides RGB output to drive an external VGA monitor. Pixel data bytes from the Video ASIC are converted to analog at the IOR, IOG, and IOB outputs of the Video RAM/DAC.
Theory of Operation RS232C Interface (diagram 10) Refer to schematic diagram 10 of the A6 CPU board for the following discussion. General Description Two dual universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (DUART) are used in this design. UARTA (U29) is used for the RS232 serial ports. UARTB (U39) channel A is setup for interfacing with the Audio Generator and channel B is used as keyboard interface.
Theory of Operation DSP Board (A7) In the DSP board circuitry, there are local registers, an analog interface port, a DMA interface, and fast static memories that reside in the processor’s port A and port B buses. A simplified block diagram is shown in Figure 3–17. The DSP (digital signal processor) accepts digital data (the digitized analog signal inputs) from either the Digital or the Analog input boards through sample transmitter/receiver ASICs. Communication with the Main/CPU is through a DMA ASIC.
Theory of Operation The DSP clock generator has 33.333 MHz applied as the reference frequency. The clock generator develops the various clock signals used throughout the DSP board. Bus Buffers and Connectors (diagram 1) The bus buffers handle the 32 bit data and address busses between the DSP and the main CPU. Reset and Clocks (diagram 2) Refer to schematic diagram 2 of the A7 DSP board for the following discussion.
Theory of Operation Sample Receivers (diagram 3) Refer to schematic diagram 3 of the A7 DSP board for the following discussion. There are two sample receivers, U10 and U11. One handles the analog samples and the other handles the digital signal. These sample receivers are identical to the sample transmitters. A single control bit, TX/RX, defines the operating mode of the ASICs. In the sample receivers, this bit is wired low.
Theory of Operation The primary purposes of the host port bus interface is to allow the DSP to access the main memory (DRAM) resident on the CPU bus. Two types of access can be performed by the DSP processor: DMA access and Host Interface access. The interface circuitry is implemented on Port B of the DSP processor. A simplified block diagram of the functions is shown in Figure 3–18.
Theory of Operation Program Register (DPR). The program register, U54 and U62, indicates various board status and control various board operations on the DSP side. Its contents can be written and read. It must be initialized by writing FFFFFFFF (hex) to the DPR after power-up or after a system reset has been active high. The register bits are defined in Table A-26.
Theory of Operation Front Panel Board (A9) The Front Panel board has the user interface buttons and touch screen circuitry. Control Register, Knobs, Beeper, and Resistive Touch Panel (diagram 1) Diagram 1 shows the control register, the knob control circuitry, the beeper, and the resistive touch panel. Control Register The control register is formed by a series of shift registers that hold a total of 128 bits.
Theory of Operation Touch Panel The resistive touch panel provides much of the interface between the user and the applications. Front panel buttons are used to select applications and make numerical entries, but the menus that control much of the operation are accessed through the touch panel. The X and Y-axis coordinates of a touch on the panel provide specific voltage level outputs from multiplexer U29. Those voltage are digitized by A/D Converter U17.
Theory of Operation string, U40. The data stream is applied to U11B (diagram 1) where it is read back to the CPU board. The front-panel processor determines the buttons that were pressed and initiates the appropriate action. Picture Monitor Assembly (A10) A simplified block diagram of the video monitor is shown in Figure 3–19. Refer to the A10 schematic diagram for CRT display versions of the AM700.
Theory of Operation Video Amplifier +12 V and +5 V Supply Vertical Deflection The Video Amplifier amplifies the incoming video signal to levels necessary to drive the crt. A cathode follower input circuit formed by Q1 and its associated biasing circuit provides impedance matching and current drive to the output video amplifier. In the output video amplifier (a cascode circuit), the video signal is inverted by Q2, a common emitter circuit.
Theory of Operation Spot Eliminator. An additional circuit formed by CR11, CR12, C44, and R66, produces an extra bias to the control grid to positively cut off beam current during turn on and turn off of the AM700. These pulses at turn on and turn off are transitory as the power supplies turn on and off. As the +55 V and –110 V voltage supplies come up, the voltage at the junction of C44 and R66 spikes negative to bias on CR12 and add a negative biasing pulse to the control grid.
Theory of Operation Focus Voltage and Dynamic Focus. The output of the focus voltage winding of T2 is rectified by CR6 and filtered by an RC π filter composed of C26, C27, and R33. The main focus voltage of about +600 V is set by FOCUS pot R36 via a DC restorer circuit composed of C28, CR8, and R38. Dynamic focusing, to optimize edge focusing of the crt, is applied from a series resonant LC circuit formed by L5 and C23 off the +55 V winding of T2.
Theory of Operation Power Supply Board (A11) A block diagram of the power supply is shown in Figure 3–20. Refer to the illustration for the following functional block description of the power supply circuitry. ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Line Voltage Switch Input Power Rectifier ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ +5V +5V Ret +Vp –Vp Inverter Switching Circuit ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ –14.4V Housekeeping +14.
Theory of Operation Power Supply Functional Block Description The power supply is an pre-regulator inverter switching supply composed of a primary rectifier, a housekeeping supply, the inverter switching circuit, output rectifiers, 15 V regulators, an alarm sensing circuitry that monitors for overvoltage, overcurrent, and over temperature conditions, and the alarm logic circuitry that shuts down the inverter switching circuitry in the event of a problem.
Theory of Operation ±15 V Regulators. The + and –15 V regulators are similar in operation. Each regulator is a combined operational amplifier and FET current pass element with a feedback loop to the operational amplifier from the output voltage. Alarm Sensing. The Alarm Sensing circuitry looks at the various supply voltages to check for undervoltage, overvoltage, overcurrent, and power fail conditions. The status of these conditions are the signals fed to the Alarm Logic circuitry. Alarm Logic.
Theory of Operation Input, Inverter, and Regulators (diagram 1) The following circuit descriptions follow the schematic diagrams and indicate the circuit components of the circuitry. Refer to schematic diagram 1 of the A11 power supply board for the following description. Input Power The AC mains voltage is applied to the preregulator power rectifier through a Line Filter (FL1), Fuse F1, and the Master Power Switch (S1) on the rear panel of the instrument.
Theory of Operation +5 V output voltage and information about the current in L4 to control pulsewidth modulation of the preregulator. On pins 8 and 9 of U1, C20 and R12 set the frequency of operation at approximately 100 kHz. Pin 2 of U1 is a +5 V, ±5 mV voltage reference. The +5 V output of the supply is divided to 2.5 V by R21 and R22 and applied to the error amplifier that is internal to U1 at pin 6 (– pin). Pin 5, the + pin of the error amplifier, is the reference voltage for the error amplifier.
Theory of Operation By design, the voltage level required to shut off the PWM is low compared to the high logic level from the Shutdown gate. A diode clamping circuit formed by R24 and CR14 prevents the SD level from exceeding the forward bias drop of the diode, about 0.6 V. Capacitor C25 bypasses fast transients from the SD input. Power Switch Driver The pulse-width modulated outputs of PWM U1 are at pins 11 and 14.
Theory of Operation Each of the secondary output voltages is full-wave rectified and filtered using choke input filter sections. The +5 V output uses two L-sections; the others use a single L-section filter. ±15 V Regulators The + and –15 V regulator pass elements, Q8 and Q9, are complementary, with Q8 being a P-channel FET and Q9 an N-channel FET. In the +15 V regulator,U8A is referenced to the +5 V developed by U5. Operational amplifier U8B is referenced to ground.
Theory of Operation Alarm Circuitry and Fan Drive (diagram 2) This circuitry includes the out-of-limit sensing components, the shutdown logic circuitry, and fan speed control components. Refer to schematic diagram 2 of the A11 power supply board for the following circuit description. Alarm Sensing LED Indicators. LED indicators (DS2 through DS8 and DS13) are placed on the input voltage side of the Power Supply Supervisor, U9.
Theory of Operation When the voltage is coming up, it is also important that the memory devices in the instrument are not written to randomly. The Power Reset Comparator has an RC timing circuit on its non-inverting input that prevents the /PWR RESET from going high for a period of time after the undervoltage condition is removed (see Figure 3–15). The delay permits the power supply voltage to stabilize before the processor is permitted to start operating.
Theory of Operation VR1, resistor R79 provides the necessary drop to keep VR1 properly biased within its current limits. The result this circuit arrangement produces is that while the voltage divider sets the proper level on pin 5 of the comparator, any change in the +5 VI current sense level is transferred fully to the comparator; the junction of R78 and R80 follows the full voltage change because that is what the voltage drop across R79 is doing.
Theory of Operation Over Voltage Indicator. If an over voltage condition exists, the /OVERVOLTS signal from U9 is applied to both U18A as input to the shutdown logic circuit and to an over voltage indicator circuit. The /OVERVOLTS signal is inverted by U16A to fire SCR Q12. When that device fires, the over voltage indicator LED, DS10 turns on to assist in troubleshooting an error condition in event of a power supply over voltage problem.
Theory of Operation Fan Drive The variable-speed fan is powered from a thermally controlled +16 to +28 V supply. A graph of the fan drive voltage versus the temperature is shown in Figure . Temperature sensing is done by RT2, a thermistor mounted on the 5 V heat sink. There are provisions for two additional temperature sensing elements in the main instrument, one of which is connected to the Main CPU heat sink.
Theory of Operation STBY/ON Switch Circuit The front-panel STBY/ON switch controls the POWER OFF logic signal to the shutdown circuitry. The master power ON/OFF switch to the power supply is located on the rear panel of the instrument. When the front-panel STBY/ON switch is in the ON position, the POWER OFF signal line is pulled low. This low is inverted by U16D and applied to the Shutdown Logic Gate, U18B, to allow the PWM to start operating if no other shutdown condition exists.
Theory of Operation LCD Driver Board (A13) The LCD Driver board (block diagram shown in Figure 3–21) digitizes the analog RGB output signals from the video display circuit into the correct digital drive signals for the LCD display. The pixel format of the display is standard VGA: 640 (H) × 480 (V). Signals output to the display are the following: 4-bits each of R,G,B (red, green, and blue), vertical sync, horizontal sync, sampling clock, enable signal, and two +5 V supply voltages.
Theory of Operation Clock Delay U8 25 MHz Clock HSYNC VSYNC DLYD25MCLK DLYDHSYNC PAL HSYNC DLYDHSYNC VSYNC +5V V Ref U3 +1.
Theory of Operation LCD Flat Panel Display (A14) The flat-panel display is a thin-film transistor device. Drive signals to the display are the 12-bit data (4 bits per color), four timing signals, and the +5 VDC supply voltage for the transistor array. LCD Backlight Backlighting for the LCD display is provided by two cold cathode florescent tubes. The two tubes, one at the top and one at the bottom, are arranged to provide edge lighting to the LDC display.
Performance Verification These functional checks are used to validate that the AM700 Audio Measurement Set is operating normally. They do not check each of the performance requirement given in the Specification section of this manual. As part of these procedures you will run the diagnostics procedures to ensure those portions of the instrument tested by the diagnostics routines are performing correctly.
Performance Verification Table 4–1: Required test equipment (cont.
Performance Verification Banana plug to phone plug ground 1/4I Phone plug. Connect to sleeve only. Banana plug, black Banana plug to XLR pin 1 + 2 1 XLR Female. Connect to pin 1. 3 Banana plug, red Common mode cable XLR Female 2 XLR Male 1 1 3 2 3 Wire used is about 1 ft., insulated XLR to BNC cable XLR Female 2 1 3 BNC BNC shield Center conductor Use a BNC coaxial cable. Cut off one end and connect to the XLR female.
Performance Verification Triple Banana to XLR cable Dual-banana plug XLR Female internal connections Red + + 2 1 3 – Black – Shield Banana plug, black Dual BNC to Dual XLR cable XLR Female 1 2 3 BNC Female Cable used is insulated coax. 1 2 3 XLR Male Dual BNC to 110 W XLR female BNC Female Cable used is insulated coax. 1 3 2 XLR Female 110W Figure 4–1: Interconnection cables (cont.
Performance Verification Verify Power Supply Operation Check the power supply at the appropriate line voltage setting for its normal use. Check 115 V Power Supply Operation 1. Check that the Line Selector switch is set for 115 V operation. 2. Connect a 115 V power source. 3. Set the rear panel supply push button on/off switch S1 to the on position. 4. Press the Stby/On switch to turn on the AM700 (Green Indicator seen in switch). 5.
Performance Verification Analog Generator Checks Initial checks list actual button presses and screen touches (soft keys) in detail to assist you in becoming familiar with the user interface operation of the AM700. As you progress through this procedure, some assumptions about your familiarity are made to reduce the instructions. As an example you may see the instruction to “make sure the generator is in High Bandwidth mode” where it is assumed that you know how to do that without explicit instructions.
Performance Verification 3. Select the generator as the acquisition input source for CH A and CH B (normal default is FP A and FP B) by touching the double arrow symbol next to the generator choice. This control toggles the generator selection between the two available choices: connection to the front panel XLR connectors or direct connection from the A and B analog generators. Press the Clear Menu button. 4.
Performance Verification Amplitude and frequency knob assignment icons Figure 4–4: Generator control display 5. Check that the analog generator is set to High Resolution, Ch A is set to Sine, Ch B is set to Follow A, and both generator outputs are enabled as shown in Figure 4–4. Also check that the control knobs for setting the generator frequency and amplitude are assigned to the analog generator. 6.
Performance Verification Figure 4–5: Waveform control display 9. Press the On button in the Generator controls section (see Figure 4–3) to turn on the generator. The On label is backlighted when the generator output is on. Press Clear Menu to return to the FFT Analyzer display. 10. Touch the second view window icon is the upper left hand corner of the screen (see Figure 4–6) to turn on both FFT display windows. Figure 4–6: View window icons 11.
Performance Verification 13. In the Generator Control menu (see Figure 4–4), select the High Bandwidth generator mode. The Analog B generator is automatically set to Follow A. 14. Touch the Waveform Control icon (on the left side of the screen), and set the generator for a frequency of 10 kHz at an amplitude of 0.0 dBu. Press the Clear Menu button. 15. Check the FFT display to see that the generator is producing a signal on Ch 1 and Ch 2, and check that the noise floor is –100 dB or lower.
Performance Verification Dual-banana plug Red + XLR Female internal connections + 2 1 3 – Black – Shield Banana plug, black Figure 4–7: Cable for generator output level check 9. Set the external RMS meter as follows: Measure mode to LEVEL Measurement units to voltage (V) Input impedance 200 kW or greater 10. Check that the Level reading is 3.5 V ±1.0% (3.465 V to 3.535 V). 11. Set the generator voltage to the settings given in Table 4–2 and check the Level reading for ±1.
Performance Verification 13. Repeat the checks of step 10 and step 11 for the Analog B generator. To change the frequency and amplitude of the Analog B generator, press the Control button in the Generator front-panel control section. Touch the Waveform Controls icon; then Touch the Analog B soft key. The Amplitude and Frequency edit boxes will now control the Analog B generator output.
Performance Verification Figure 4–8: Advanced analog controls display XLR Female + 2 1 3 BNC BNC shield Center conductor Use a BNC coaxial cable. Cut off one end and connect to the XLR female. Figure 4–9: Generator frequency check cable 4. Set the generator frequency to 10 kHz and check the AM700 generator frequency accuracy is within ±0.01% (9999 to 10001) using the frequency counter. 5. Disconnect the frequency counter and reconnect the RMS meter test cable to the Analog A generator output. 6.
Performance Verification The measured RMS voltage should be within 0.1 dB (≈1%) of the generator setting at 120 Hz (the reference frequency). The measured RMS voltage at 10 Hz and 1 kHz should be within ±0.1 dB (≈1%) of the measured RMS voltage at 120 Hz. At 20 kHz, the measured RMS should be within +0.1 to –0.2 dB (≈+1% to –2%) of the measured RMS voltage at 120 Hz.
Performance Verification 5. Touch the Advanced Analog Controls icon to display the screen shown previously in Figure 4–8. 6. Select High Resolution Distortion Reduction mode for Channel A and Channel B. The selection indicator box is checked when selected. 7. Check that the Channel A and Channel B THD + N reduces to approximately 0.0025%. 8. Turn off Low Distortion Mode for Ch A and Ch B. Check High Bandwidth Generator 1. Press the Generator Control button. 2.
Performance Verification ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Performance Verification 5. Check that the RMS level is equal to or less than –115 dBu (or –115 dBm without a 600 W load). 6. Set the generator to High BW mode. Make sure the output amplitude is still at 0.0 Volts. 7. Check that the RMS level is equal to or less than –95 dBu (or –95 dBm without a 600 W load. Check Analog Generator Output Impedance 1. Press the Analyzer Application button. It takes about 20 seconds for the Analyzer mode to be loaded and calibrated. 2.
Performance Verification 7. Press the mV/kHz button in the keypad to change the units to mV and press Enter. 8. Press the Configure button. 9. Touch the Input Selection soft key. 10. Make sure the input selection for Ch A and Ch B are set to FP A and FP B, not Gen A and Gen B. 11. Set the Impedance for FP A and FP B to 600 W by touching the Impedance edit box and turning the control knob to scroll through the impedance choices until 600 W is displayed in the edit box.
Performance Verification 26. Touch the Advanced Analog Controls soft key. 27. Touch the Output Impedance soft key. 28. Select 600 W and press the Enter button. 29. Press Clear Menu button. 30. Check to see that the Level reading dropped to approximately 500 mV (509.9 mV) (within a few percent). Check Follow Mode 1. Set the B analog generator to follow mode. 2. Set the A analog generator to 5 V at 8 kHz. 3. Check the B generator output for 5 V at 8 kHz Check Generator Float 1.
Performance Verification 8. Set the generator output to Floating. NOTE. There is a difference in the floating impedance between the CRT version instrument and the flat panel display instrument. 9. Flat panel display version: Check that pin 1 of the XLR output is approximately 825 W to ground. 10. CRT display version: a. Turn the power off. b. Check that pin 1 of the XLR output is approximately 1 kW to ground. 11. Disconnect the test equipment from the AM700. 12. Turn the power back on.
Performance Verification Figure 4–13: Input Configuration control panel 4. Press the Clear Menu button. 5. Press the Control button in the Generator section of the front panel. 6. Set the A analog generator to High Res mode, with a sine-wave signal output as shown in Figure 4–4 on page 4–8. 7. Set the B analog generator to Follow A mode. Touch the Waveform Control soft key and set Analog A Frequency to 1.00 kHz and Amplitude to 3.50 V. Press the Clear Menu button. 8.
Performance Verification Figure 4–14: Audio Analyzer graphical display with real time (RT) view visible 12. Touch the number area in the Range edit field of Ch A, press the Units button in the keypad (see Figure 4–15), and press the V/Hz button to select V as the units for the input range. Figure 4–15: Keypad entry buttons 13. Use the key pad to set the input range to 3.88 V. 14. Repeat step 12 and step 13 for Ch B.
Performance Verification 15. Press the Menu button, touch Enables, and enable the THD measurement. Channel 1 and Channel 2 must also both be enabled. Deselect any of the other enables that may be selected. Press Clear Menu. 16. Check the frequency measurement and THD + N at 3.5 V and 1 kHz for both Ch A and Ch B in the RT display window. The THD + N reading should be approximately 0.005%. 17.
Performance Verification Figure 4–16: Audio Analyzer main menu with input range and input select submenus Table 4–5: High resolution analyzer checks ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Performance Verification ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Performance Verification Check High BW Mode 1. Press the Menu button and touch Input Selection soft key. 2. If not already done, in the Input Configuration control panel, set the generator to analyzer connection to internal. Set the Ch 1 and Ch 2 analyzer inputs to High BW mode by touching the Analog HBW Inputs soft key. 3. Set the CH A and CH B input ranges to manual (Auto unchecked). 4. Set the analog generator to High BW mode (this automatically sets the B generator to follow mode). 5.
Performance Verification ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
Performance Verification Check FFT Analyzer Operation This operational check of the FFT Analyzer checks: Check FFT Analyzer H Averaging H Noise Floor H High Resolution BW (20 kHz) H High BW (80 kHz) 1. Select the FFT Analyzer if it is not already selected. 2. Set the High Resolution generator for 5 kHz at –50 dBu. 3.
Performance Verification Figure 4–17: FFT Analyzer Window menu display 8. Check that the noise floor is below –120 dBu. Check Harmonic Content 1. Set the High Resolution generator to an amplitude of 0 dBu and a frequency of 1 kHz. 2. Looking at the generator output with the High Resolution FFT, check to see that any harmonics of the fundamental are –85 dB or lower relative to the fundamental.
Performance Verification Check Autorange Function 1. Press the FFT Application button (if the FFT Analyzer is not already operating). 2. Connect the A and B Analog generator outputs to the Ch A and Ch B input connectors. 3. Press the Configure button. a. Touch the Input Selection soft key. b. Touch the source “toggle” icon soft key to select FP A and FP B. 4. Set the Ch A and Ch B Input ranges to Auto. Press Clear Menu 5. Press the Control button in the Generator controls. a.
Performance Verification Check Analog Acquisition Noise Floor 1. Press the Menu button. a. Touch the Analog HRes Inputs soft key (if the FFT Analyzer is not presently in High Resolution mode). 2. Press the Configure button. a. Touch the Input Selection soft key. b. Touch the source “toggle” icon soft key to select Gen A and Gen B. c. Press the Clear Menu button. 3. Press and hold the Average button. a. Touch the Processing soft key. b.
Performance Verification 11. Press the Average button to turn off Hold Maximum in the active view. 12. Touch the view 1 screen area and and press the Average button. Observe that the noise floor with no averaging is less than –130 dBu. Input Impedance Verification These checks verify the input impedances of the Audio Analyzer on channel A and channel B. Set Up the Generator 1. Set the external generator to output a 1 kHz sine wave, and set the generator output to 0.775 V. 2.
Performance Verification Verify CRT Display Operation AM700 Setup Check Display Focus 1. Press Analyzer. When the Analyzer application has loaded, select all four graph view windows for display. Do not select the RT view window. 1. Check the focus in the center of the screen. 2. Check the focus at the corners of the screen. The focus should not be objectionable in any area of the screen. Check Size, Linearity, Trace Rotation, and Centering 1.
Performance Verification 3. Rotate the large control knob counterclockwise to decrease the display intensity to 0%. 4. Check that the display is completely dimmed. 5. Release the Display button then press and hold it in again. 6. Check that the display brightness is now set for 90%. 7. Rotate the large control knob clockwise to increase the brightness to 100%, then release the Display button. 8. Select the FFT Analyzer. 9.
Performance Verification Verify Flat Panel Display Operation 1. Press FFT. When the FFT application has loaded, touch View Setup, select the Spectrogram display, and then touch the Accept Changes soft key. 2. Check that there are no streaks or color smears of red, green, or blue. 3. In the UTILITIES front panel selections, press the Configure button. 4. Verify that the Configuration options: display has no streaks or color smears.
Performance Verification Verify Digital Generator These checks are done using one AM700 Audio Measurement Set (the test AM700) as a signal source or measurement instrument for the AM700 being tested (the DUT). Clock Rate Range and Accuracy 1. Turn power on both AM700 Audio Measurement Sets. 2. After FFT application is initialized, make the following choices for both measurement sets: a. Press the Configure button. b. In the Configure menu, touch the State Saving soft key. c.
Performance Verification 12. Set DUT as follows: Set Long Cable Simulation = OFF 13. Connect the DUT to the test AM700 as follows: DUT Digital Out signal to the test AM700 Digital In connector DUT AES REF OUT to the test AM700 AES REF IN connector 14. Touch the Interface Timing soft key, and then touch the Clock Phase Offset soft key. Press the Units button until the units are set to UI. 15. Set the DUT Clock Phase Offset to: –1, +1, –64, and +63.5. Check that the test AM700 Phase Diff.
Performance Verification Check High Frequency Jitter Tolerance 1. Connect the test equipment as follows: DUT Digital Out to the test AM700 Digital In. DUT BNC OUT to DUT BNC IN. Test AM700 Digital Out to DUT AES REF IN. 2. Set DUT: Input = RP BNC; Mode = From Ref. 3. Set the test AM700: Press Select Touch Set Press Set Jitter Generation soft key Generate Jitter Sine soft key Jitter Ampl Jitter Ampl = 0.12 UIp-p Jitter Freq Jitter Freq = 30 kHz 4. Increase the test AM700 Jitter Ampl in steps of 0.
Performance Verification 4. Setup the oscilloscope to view the signal. Typical settings are as follows: Time/Div Volts/Div Trigger Trigger Source Trigger Level CH 1 and CH 2 50 ns/div 1 V/div Normal CH 3 (trigger input) Auto On 5. Check on the oscilloscope, that the time from REF zero crossing to Main zero crossing is less than 50 ns. Output Level 1. Connect DUT Digital Out to a differential oscilloscope inputs using the 110 W XLR to dual BNC adapter cable shown in Figure 4–18. 2.
Performance Verification 9. Connect DUT AES REF OUT to the differential oscilloscope inputs using the 110 W XLR-to-dual-BNC adapter. 10. Check for 4.9 to 5.9 Vp-p. Phase Jitter Generation 1. Connect the DUT as follows: AES REF OUT XLR connector to the oscilloscope CH 3 trigger input using 110 W to 75 W impedance matching transformer. 2. Connect DUT Unbalanced Out BNC to the oscilloscope CH 1 input using a 75 W coaxial cable and a 75 W feed through termination. 3.
Performance Verification Digital Receiver The following check verify the operation of the Digital Receiver hardware. Receiver Interface Parameter Measurements 1. Connect the DUT as follows: Digital Out to Digital In UNBALANCE OUT to UNBALANCE IN 2. Set DUT controls as follows: Press Touch Press Touch Select Press Touch Select Digital button Icon Eye Diagram soft key Configure button Input Selection soft key FP XLR, Clear Menu button Menu button Interface Ampl soft key XLR Output = 0.15 Vp-p 3.
Performance Verification 5. Check the Main Channel Level as indicated in Table 4–8. ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Table 4–8: BNC output and main output test Main channel level Check Clock Rate BNC output Min Max 0.03 0.013 0.052 0.10 0.072 0.132 0.50 0.412 0.
Performance Verification d. Set the Clock Phase Offset to the following values: 0, 0.5 UI, –0.5 UI, 63.5 UI, and –64 UI 2. Check that the Phase Diff. on the test AM700 reads the same as the values in step 1, part d ±1 UI. NOTE. 64 UI = –64 UI just as 180° = –180°) Check Phase Jitter (Jitter spectrum flatness) 1. Connect the test AM700 as follows: Test AM700 Digital Out to DUT Digital In 2.
Performance Verification Table 4–9: Phase Jitter 1 Test AM700: Jitter freq = ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Jitter ampl = 10 UI Test AM00 50 Hz 200 Hz 1 kHz D 1x, 120 Hz 18 – 22 18 – 22 19 – 21 U 1x, 1200 Hz 18 – 22 18 – 22 19 – 21 T 8x, 1200 Hz 18 – 22 18 – 22 N/A c. Set the test AM700 Jitter Amplitude = 0.
Performance Verification 8. Press the Rescale button and check that any other spurs found are below –40 dBUI. Check Peak-to-Peak Jitter Measurement Accuracy 1. Connect the test AM700 as follows: Test AM700 Digital Out to DUT Digital In (XLR) 2. Set the DUT controls as follows: Press Touch Press Touch Select Select Digital button icon Eye Diagram soft key Menu button Eye/Jitter Detection soft key LF Rejection = 120 Hz Jitter Gain = x1 3.
Performance Verification a. Do the checks for 120 Hz LF Rej at a jitter amplitude of 0.2 UI first from 500 Hz to 30 kHz; then make the 1200 Hz Lf Rej check at 30 kHz (1200 Hz LF Rej is only checked at 30 kHz). b. Set the jitter amplitude to 0.65 UI and make the 1200 Hz LF Rej check; then switch the LF Rej to 120 Hz to make the check from 30 kHz down to 500 Hz jitter frequency.
Performance Verification NOTE. If the residual peak-to-peak jitter exceeds 0.05 UI, change the sample frequency on the test AM700 to 44.1 kHz as follows: press the Menu button, touch the Digital Audio soft key, touch the Sample Rate soft key; rotate the large knob to select 44.1 kHz, and press enter to make the change. Remake the check. of step 3. Reset the sample rate to 48 kHz when you are done with the checks. Check Input and Output Impedance Check the Digital Out and AES REF Out as follows: 1.
Performance Verification shown in Figure 4–20 to make the connection from the XLR connector to the oscilloscope inputs. 5. Measure the terminated-output level using the oscilloscope. 6. Calculate the ratio of the input-terminated level to open-circuit level. 7. Check that this ratio is in the range of 0.45 to 0.55. BNC Female Cable used is insulated coax. 1 XLR Female 2 3 110W Figure 4–20: Dual BNC to 110 XLR female adapter cable 8. Measure the terminated-output level. 9.
Performance Verification Check the UNBALANCE OUT AND IN impedance as follows: 1. Connect the UNBALANCE OUT connector to the oscilloscope with 48 inch or shorter 75 W cable. 2. Record the open circuit output level as measured with the oscilloscope. 3. Terminate the cable at the oscilloscope using BNC tee connector and 0.025%, 75 W termination. 4. Record the terminated output level. 5. Calculate the ratio of the input-terminated level to open-circuit level. 6. Check that this ratio is in the range of 0.
Performance Verification Check the DSP Port The following procedure checks that the DSP port functions to provide direct input and output of digital signals to and from the DSP. DSP Port Test 1. Connect a DSP PORT test cable on the rear panel from the test AM700 to DUT. 2. On a PC, use Edit to make a file called dport.on" which contains the following command line to switch the DSP to the transmit mode: scpi INT: SOUR:DSP:TMODE on NOTE.
Performance Verification 6. Set the AM700 (DUT) under test as follows: a. Press the GENERATOR/Control button, touch the DSP soft key, and then touch the Waveform Control soft key. Make the following selections: Select Digital SF 1 Sine Frequency = 1 kHz Amplitude = 0 dBu Select Digital SF 2 Sine Frequency = 5 kHz Amplitude = 0 dBu b. Press the Clear Menu button. c. In the GENERATOR control panel, press the Generator On button. d. Press the FFT button, and then press the Configure button. e.
Performance Verification f. Press the FFT button, and then the Configure button. Touch the System Setup soft key; then touch the Input Selection soft key. Make the following selections: Channel 1 = DSP A Channel 2 = DSP B g. Press the Clear Menu button, and then the Configure button. Touch the System Setup soft key, and then the Conversion Standards soft key. Make the following selection: Digital Audio Sampling Rate = Interface Clock h. Touch the Accept Changes soft key. i.
Performance Verification Check Digital Interface Tester (DIT) Functionality 1. Reset the AM700 setting to Factory Default as follows: a. Press the Configure button. b. Touch the State Saving soft key, and then touch Factory Defaults. 2. Press Configure button. a. Press the Input Selection soft key. b. Press the source “toggle” icon soft key to select AES Gen for DigMain SF1 and SF2. c. Press Clear Menu button. 3. Press MENU button. a.
Performance Verification l. Touch the Jitter Gain soft key to select X8 gain. m. Press the Average button. n. Press the Rescale button. o. Check to see that the largest spike in the jitter spectrum is lower than –45 dBUI. Check Disk Drive and File Transfer Operation This procedure checks that the disks drive functions for file transfers. 1. Insert a blank MS DOS formatted, 1.44 Meg disk in the AM700 disk drive. 2.
Performance Verification 3. Touch Drive on the right side of the Storage Manager screen to select the nvram:.directory. 4. On the right side of the Storage Manager screen select the function directory. This done by first touching the directory name to shift the knob focus to that side. Once the focus is shifted, you can use the large knob to make further selections by scrolling through the list. 5. With the function/directory highlighted, touch the Change Directory soft key to go into that directory.
Performance Verification The AM700 then resets and displays the AM700 STARTUP MENU choices shown in Figure 4–22. Low Level Diagnostic Interface --- AM700 STARTUP MENU --Key Selection __________________________________ H R D U ... ... ... ... Diagnostics -HELP- Menu Instrument -RUN MODES- Menu Low Level -DIAGNOSTICS- Menu -UTILITIES- Menu F ... -FIRMWARE- Date Codes __________________________________ = ... Reprint @ ...
Performance Verification --- FLOPPY DIAGNOSTIC --Configure CUSTOM RUN MODE parameters and the test sequence as desired. Key Selection ____________________________________ S ... -Sequence- Type (CUSTOM) 1 ... Advance Mode (MANUAL) 2 ... Result Display Mode (SHOW ALL) 3 ... Result Logging Mode (DISABLED) B____________________________________ ... -BUILD- New Test Sequence = ... Reprint @ ...
Performance Verification 7. Select “C” Drive Stress Test and press the Select button. 8. After you have made the test selections you want in the custom list, highlight the ! (Done Selecting) and press Select. This returns to the next higher level menu where the choice to run the tests in the custom list you have just made becomes available. 9. Select “R” Run Test Sequence and press the Select button to begin the drive stress test. You have to insert a MS DOS formatted 1.
Performance Verification Check Headphones, GPIB, and Hardcopy These final checks verify the head phone audio output and volume control, the operation of the GPIB interface for remote control, and the hard copy function to print to an external printer. DUT Under Test Setup Check Headphone Function In the Input Configuration menu select GEN A and GEN B input sources and press the Generator On button to turn both generators on. 1. Press the Control button in the Generator control panel area. a.
Performance Verification 6. Configure the GPIB address for address 1 and the GPIB mode for Talk/ Listen as shown in Figure 4–27, if it is not already setup that way. 7. Touch Accept Changes to apply the change and exit back to the application. 8. From the GPIB controller, send the *ID? command to check for proper configuration. If the AM700 responds with its identification, the GPIB interface is operational. 9.
Performance Verification 5. Press and release the Copy front panel button to send a hard copy to the printer. 6. Press and Hold the Copy front panel button to display the Copy Configuration menu (see Figure 4–28). Figure 4–28: Copy configuration menu 7. Configure the Copy Format to PostScript Image and the Copy Style to Gray Scale. 8. Configure the Copy Destination for Serial Port 2 for the laser printer. 9. Touch the Accept Changes soft key to make the selections and clear the menu. 10.
Performance Verification 4–62 AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Adjustment Procedures The procedures in this section are designed to adjust the circuitry of the AM700 Audio Measurement Set to return it to specified accuracy. Test Equipment Required The test equipment needed to perform the adjustment procedures is listed in Table 5–1. Use the test equipment shown or an equivalent to do the adjustments. If the example test equipment is not available, check the Minimum Specification column to determine if you can use another piece of test equipment.
Adjustment Procedures Table 5–1: Equipment required list (cont.) Equipment Minimum specification Purpose Example Interconnection cable Coaxial cable, 50 W, 42 inches, BNC connectors Signal interconnection Tektronix part number 012–0057–01 Adapter connector Female BNC to hook clip connectors.
Adjustment Procedures Table 5–1: Equipment required list (cont.) Equipment Minimum specification Purpose Example Set of geometry correction magnets Tektronix adjustment magnets Geometry alignment for the CRT monitor Blue (strongest); Tektronix part number 119–1616–00 Green; Tektronix part number 119–1863–00 Red; Tektronix part number 119–1615–00 Yellow; Tektronix part number 119–4341–00 1 A Tegam TM500 or TM5000 power supply is required to power the plug-in module.
Adjustment Procedures Table 5–2: AM700 adjustments (cont.) Board name Circuit board Circuit no. Vertical Size R45 Horizontal Hold R20 Horizontal Phase (centering) R15 Trace Rotation R67 Power Supply A11 +5 V Adjust R14 LCD Driver Board A13 Red Offset (omitted) R37 Green Offset (omitted) R39 Blue Offset (omitted) R41 Red Gain F6 Green Gain R7 Blue Gain R9 BRT R24 Preparation for Adjustment 1. Turn off the AM700 using the rear power power switch.
Adjustment Procedures Power Supply Verification The power supply adjustment is not accessible when the supply is installed in the AM700. The power supply is adjusted either using a load unit (in manufacturing) or during servicing using the correct extender cables. It is not a normal customer adjustment. Under normal conditions, the power supply should not require adjustment. The verification procedure determines if there is a problem with the power supply that requires servicing.
Adjustment Procedures Factory Service Adjustment This procedure is provided for factory service to check for proper operation to determine if repairs or adjustment are needed. Test Equipment Required The following test equipment is needed to verify and adjust the power supply: H Test oscilloscope with 1X probe H Digital voltmeter H Universal load unit 1. Remove the power supply from the AM700 and connect it to the power load unit. 2.
Adjustment Procedures 4. Do the power supply verification procedure using the oscilloscope to check for proper power supply operation. 5. Adjust R15 (+5 V adjust) for 5.05 V on the DVM. 6. Vary the input voltage from 90 Vrms to 132 Vrms on low range or 180 Vrms to 253 Vrms on high range to verify normal power supply operation over the specified input voltage range.
Adjustment Procedures A MSB B MSB Freq.
Adjustment Procedures 6. Press Rescale in the System Control front panel selections. 7. While observing the FFT, adjust R252 until the null point is reached for the second and third harmonics. 8. Move the test signal from the Channel A input to the Channel B input and select View 2 for display. 9. Press Rescale in the System Control front panel selections. 10. While observing the FFT, adjust R245 until the null point is reached for the second and third harmonics.
Adjustment Procedures 7. Using 50 W coaxial cable, connect the INPUT A of the audio analyzer to TP4 (CHB OUT) and TP10 (AGND) of the AM700 analog acquisition board. 8. Set the generator output of the audio analyzer for a 1 kHz sine wave at an amplitude of 1 V. 9. On the audio analyzer, press the RELATIVE LEVEL key to set the reference to 0.00 dB. 10. Set the generator output of the audio analyzer for a 80 kHz sine wave at an amplitude of 1 V. 11.
Adjustment Procedures Display Monitor Adjustment (for CRT display monitor) The following adjustment steps are used to align the CRT display. These adjustments include those needed for factory service alignment after repairs to the display monitor module and a shorter procedure for alignment of the installed display monitor. Use the procedures in the Remove and Replacement Procedures in the Maintenance section beginning on page 6–73 to remove the display monitor assembly for repair and reinstallation.
Adjustment Procedures Preparation to Align The following procedure requires removal of the instrument cabinet and some of the circuit board assemblies to remove and replace the CRT display monitor assembly. The procedure assumes that a part of the CRT display monitor assembly is being replaced for a factory service repair.
Adjustment Procedures ESD free table or work station so they will be safe from ESD (electrostatic discharge) damage. CAUTION. The back-up battery on the CPU needs to be protected from being accidentally shorted. e. Remove the two screws from Digital Audio board, and then lift the circuit board gently away from the plastic posts. Put this board on an ESD free table to protect it from damage until it is ready to be reinstalled. f.
Adjustment Procedures 4. Center the display using the beam centering rings. NOTE. The centering rings cause some distortion to the display. Adjust the centering rings for the least amount of distortion and the best centering. 5. Repeat step 3 and step 4 until the full screen display is correctly centered. 6. Loosen the yoke retaining screw and rotate the deflection yoke so that the raster is parallel to the bottom of the front chassis casting. 7.
Adjustment Procedures Horiz Width Focus Horiz Phase White Level Black Level Horiz Retrace Vert Retrace Vert Pos Trace Rotation VGA Input Horiz Hold Vert Hold Vert Size Vert Lin Figure 5–4: CRT display monitor board adjustment locations Adjust the CRT Display with a Test Pattern VGA Signal Applied Adjust the size and linearity of the CRT display using the following procedure. 1. Connect a video source cable to J2 on monitor board and install the test CRT graticule. 2.
Adjustment Procedures 4. Insert the Monitor adjustment disk to in the PC, and run the program to display cross hatch pattern. 5. Make the display monitor size and linearity adjustments. a. Adjust L4 (HORIZ WIDTH) so that the width of the test pattern is as wide as the test graticule. b. Adjust R43 (V SIZE) so that the height of the test pattern is as tall as the test graticule. c. Adjust R57 (V CENTER) to center the test pattern vertically in the test graticule. d.
Adjustment Procedures c. Adjust L5 (Dynamic Focus) for best possible focus at the corners of the display. d. Recheck the white level adjustment. 8. Adjust trace rotation a. Install the crt test graticule. b. Display the crosshatch test pattern. c. Connect the trace rotation coil from the yoke to J7 on the display monitor circuit board. d. Adjust R67 (TRACE ROT) as needed, to square the test pattern with the test graticule.
Adjustment Procedures CRT Display Adjustment The following procedure is used to make the CRT alignment adjustments on an installed display monitor. It is used to compensate for the minor changes that can affect the CRT adjustments over time. 1. Perform the verification procedure of the CRT display (Verify CRT Display Operation on page 4–33) to determine the extend of adjustment needed. Make only the adjustments needed as indicated from the verification procedure. 2.
Adjustment Procedures NOTE. Magnets added to yoke assembly and around the CRT at the factory are used to square up the corners of the display. The magnets are secured with silicone adhesive and should not require replacement or relocation under normal operation. Some careful repositioning of the magnets around the front edge of the CRT may be required for the best adjustment of the corners of the display. 7.
Adjustment Procedures LCD Driver Board Adjustment (for LCD flat panel display) The following adjustment steps set up the offset and gain for the red, green, and blue analog to digital converters; and adjust the brightness level of the LCD panel backlighting. Test Equipment Needed Preparation for the LCD Driver Adjustments The following test equipment is needed: H Test oscilloscope with probes H Adjustment tool 1.
Adjustment Procedures 8. Move the oscilloscope probe tip to the MSB of the Green ADC at TP7.
Adjustment Procedures Fine Adjustment of the ADC Gain Verify the Gain and Offset Adjustments 1. Observe the Spectrogram display. There should be no streaks or color smears in the Spectrogram color legend. If there are any streaks or color smears, adjust the associated color offset potentiometer slightly (R6 for Red, R7 for Green, and R8 for Blue) to eliminate them. 1. In the UTILITIES front panel selections, press the Configure button. 2.
Adjustment Procedures Analog Generator Board Adjustment These adjustment steps set the DAC gain for the correct level of output signal for Channel A and Channel B of the analog generator. Test Equipment Required Set up Test Equipment and the AM700 The following test equipment is needed: H Precision digital multimeter or RMS meter H XLR to banana connector adaptor cables H Adjustment tool 1. Set up the precision digital multimeter. a.
Adjustment Procedures d. Set the CH B Waveform for Sine as well. Touch the CH B Waveform soft key and use the large control knob to highlight Sine, the touch the pop-up list as before to accept that choice. (Do not use Follow A. This will make the B generator signal the same as generator A, but it will not fully exercise the B generator signal generation path.) e. Check that both Ch A and Ch B are enabled (a check mark in both Enabled soft keys). If not, enable them. f.
Adjustment Procedures 3. Adjust the A DAC GAIN, R24, of the Analog Generator for an amplitude of 1.000V ± 0.0001V. See Figure 5–6 for the adjustment locations. 4. Move the XLR connector from Ch A OUT to Ch B OUT. 5. Adjust the B DAC GAIN, R18, of the Analog Generator for an amplitude of 1.000V ± 0.0001V. 6. Disconnect the test equipment from the AM700.
Adjustment Procedures Digital Audio Board Adjustments The following adjustments set the control voltage of the phase-lock-loop circuits and sets the digital generator amplitude. Test Equipment Required Mechanical Setup The following test equipment is needed: H Digital voltmeter H Test oscilloscope H BNC cable, 75 W H BNC termination, 75 W H Alignment tool H Extender cables for Digital Audio circuit board H Insulated work surface 1.
Adjustment Procedures Set up the AM700 1. Press the Digital front panel button and power on the AM700 to start it with the Digital application running. 2. Press the Configure button. 3. Touch the Save State soft key. 4. Touch the Set Factory Defaults soft key. 5. Verify that you want to restore the factory defaults. 6. Press Configure again. Touch the Input Select soft key. 7. Set the Input for AES generator. 8. Press Clear Menu. 9. Select the Eye Diagram icon. 10. Press the Menu button. 11.
Adjustment Procedures 7. Adjust L1, Frequency control for U64 in the Generator PLL circuit, for a voltage of 7 V to 8 V. 8. Connect the + lead of the DVM to pin 6 of J33. Check for a voltage of 7 V to 8 V. 9. Adjust L16, Frequency control for U123 in the Eye Sampler circuit, for a voltage of 7 V to 8 V. 10. Turn off the power to the AM700, disconnect the power cord from the AC source, and disconnect the test leads and extender cables from the Digital Audio board.
Adjustment Procedures Freq Offset Freq Adj Freq Offset Freq Adj Eye Sampler Freq Adj PLL Test J33 GEN PLL Adj Freq Gen Level Figure 5–8: Digital audio board test points and adjustment locations AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 5–29
Adjustment Procedures Adjusting the Digital Generator Level 1. Connect the AES Unbalanced Out signal to Ch 1 input of the test oscilloscope through a 75 W BNC coaxial cable and a 75 W BNC termination. 2. Set the oscilloscope for 0.2 V/div to view a 1 V p-p square wave signal and auto trigger on the input signal. 3. Adjust R483, Generator Level, for a 1 V p-p square wave (5 div ±0.25 div). 4. Disconnect the test equipment from the AM700. This completes the internal adjustment procedure of the AM700.
Adjustment Procedures 6. After the calibration has finished, press Clear Menu. Then, select Digital as the application to load. Digital Calibration 1. With the Digital Application running, press the Configure front panel button and again touch the System Setup soft key. 2. Select Calibrate and touch the Calibrate Now soft key. 3. After the calibration has finished, press Clear Menu. This completes the adjustment procedure for the AM700.
Adjustment Procedures 5–32 AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Maintenance This section discusses the various options available for servicing the Tektronix AM700 Audio Measurement Set. It also contains instructions for preventive maintenance, general troubleshooting, and corrective maintenance. If the instrument does not function properly, troubleshooting and corrective measures should be taken immediately to circumvent additional problems. Service Options A number of servicing options are available.
Maintainence 2. Surround the instrument with polyethylene sheeting to protect the finish. 3. Cushion the instrument on all sides by tightly packing dunnage or urethane foam between the carton and the instrument. Allow three inches on all sides for cushioning. 4. Seal the carton with shipping tape or an industrial stapler. Static-Sensitive Components This instrument contains electrical components that are susceptible to damage from static discharge.
Maintainence H Keep the component leads shorted together whenever possible. H Pick up the components by the body, never by the leads. H Do not slide the components over any surface. H Avoid handling components in areas that have a floor or work surface covering capable of generating a static charge. H Use a soldering iron that is connected to earth ground. NOTE. A 2% RMA flux content solder is recommended for making repairs in this instrument. Cleaning of rosin residue is not recommended.
Maintainence The voltage range selection switch and fuse holder are located in the lower left corner of the AM700 rear panel (see Figure 6–1). The AM700 is shipped from the factory set for the operating voltage of the destination nation (115 VAC or 230 VAC). If the setting is not correct, it must be changed before connecting the power cord to the power source. 1. Turn off the rear-panel power switch and disconnect the power cord from the mains supply. 2.
Maintainence Preventive Maintenance Preventive maintenance consists of cleaning, visual inspection, performance checking, and, if needed, readjustment. The preventive maintenance schedule established for the instrument should be based on the environment in which it is operated and the amount of use. Under average conditions, scheduled preventive maintenance should be performed every 2000 hours of operation. Tools Required H Clean, non-abrasive cloth. H Non-abrasive liquid glass cleaner.
Maintainence After cleaning, allow the interior to thoroughly dry before applying power to the instrument. CAUTION. Do not allow water to get inside any enclosed assembly or component. Do not clean any plastic materials with organic cleaning solvents, such as benzene, toluene, xylene, acetone, or similar compounds, because they may damage the plastic.
Maintainence Major Assembly Interconnection Signals and power supply voltages are passed through the instrument by a system of interconnecting cables. The connector holders and cables are keyed to prevent incorrect installation in most cases. A triangular key symbol is used to identify pin 1 on the circuit board to assist in aligning the correct pins on the mating connector.
Maintainence NVRAM State Clearing In the event that the AM700 should ever go into continuous reset mode or lockup, it may be caused by an invalid instrument state that is stored in NVRAM. If this is the case, the problem is cleared by removing the stored states from NVRAM; restoring factory defaults does not clear the problem. To clear the NVRAM, use the following procedure to enter the diagnostics mode and run the utility provided for this task. NOTE. Clearing the NVRAM also deletes all user-saved files.
Maintainence --- UTILITIES MENU --Key Selection --------------------------------------E ... - ERROR LOG - utilities N ... - NVRAM - utilities I ... - Change Display - F ... Reprogram INTENSITY - Flash EEPROMS - D ... Calibrate - LCD DISPLAY -------------------------------------= ... Reprint @ ... Abort Menu -------------------------------------Input your selection: --- UTILITIES MENU --Key Selection --------------------------------------E ... - ZERO - System NVRAM F ...
Maintainence 5. Use the large control knob to select C, then press the Select front-panel button to enter your selection. This brings up the CLEAR SYSTEM NVRAM Utility.
Maintainence Power Supply Status Indicators The voltages produced by the main power supply are monitored by LED indicators as shown in Figure 6–2 or Figure 6–3. During normal operation all the green LED indicators should be on. Error conditions (over temperature, over voltage, under voltage, and over current) are indicated by red LED indicators. These indicators may be seen through the ventilation holes in the side of the power supply housing when the cover of the AM700 is removed.
Maintainence 6–12 AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics Diagnostics in the AM700 are divided into two sets, low level and high level. The distinction between the two types is based upon the operating system; those diagnostics that run before the instrument’s operating system is booted are referred to as low level; those that run as applications executed by the operating system are referred to as high level.
Diagnostics NOTE. Diagnostics can also be controlled and executed remotely through the serial port. This method is most useful if the display system is inoperative or in a service environment for programmed troubleshooting of the AM700. During execution, diagnostics give positive feedback of progress, indicating results as they are gathered.
Diagnostics Because a rigidly formatted output excludes much useful information, any main or sub-result line can have associated with it one or more lines of indented commentary. Whereas sub-result lines are indented one level of indentation from their associated main results, comments will be indented two levels from their associated main results, whether they are actually associated with the main result or the sub-result.
Diagnostics Entry to high level diagnostics menu from other Diagnostics High level diagnostic interface main menu Backdoor entry to high level diagnostics menu Instrument run modes High level diagnostics Powerup AutoReset Quick Start Analog acq diags (HL) Low level menu Reset to low level diagnostics mode Low level diagnostics AM700 start up menu Backdoor entry to low level diagnostics menu Instrument run modes Diagnostics help menu Instrument powerup modes list Diagnostic front panel button
Diagnostics From low level diagnostics AM700 start up menu Low level diagnostics CPU Diagnostics (LL) Display diagnostics (LL) DSP Diagnostics (LL) Overall run mode Power up Auto reset Overall run mode Power up Auto reset Overall run mode Power up Auto reset Custom Custom Custom Sequence Advance mode Result display mode Build a sequence Run the sequence Sequence Advance mode Result display mode Build a sequence Run the sequence Sequence Advance mode Result display mode Build a sequence Run the
Diagnostics High Level Diagnostic Interface --- MAIN MENU --Key Selection __________________________________ R ... Instrument -RUN MODESD ... High Level -DIAGNOSTICS- Menu __________________________________ = ... Reprint @ ... Abort Menu __________________________________ Input your selection: Figure 6–6: High level diagnostics main menu In the Instrument Run Modes menu (shown in Figure 6–7 for V1.02 firmware and in Figure 6–8 for V1.0/V1.
Diagnostics High Level Diagnostic Interface --- INSTRUMENT RUN MODES --NOTE: Modes marked (R) will RESET the instrument. Key Selection __________________________________________________________ N ... -NORMAL- ........... (R) run powerup diagnostics A ... -AUTORESET- ........ (R) run all diagnostics Q ... -QUICK START- ...... (R) skip all diagnostics L ... -LOW LEVEL MENU- ... (R) run Low Level Diags Infc --------------------------------------------------------= ... Reprint @ ...
Diagnostics In this menu, select “D” (Low Level Diagnostics Menu) and press select to access the Low Level Diagnostics menu shown in Figure 6–10 (V1.02) or Figure 6–11 (V1.00/1.01). Low Level Diagnostic Interface The Low Level Diagnostics menu changed between V1.0/V1.01 firmware and V1.02 firmware. The V1.02 firmware menu adds more diagnostic choices shown in the menu in Figure 6–10. The V1.0/V1.01 Low Level Diagnostic menu choices are shown following the V1.02 menu in Figure 6–11.
Diagnostics The low-level diagnostics consists of sets of tests that check the CPU (central processing unit), the Display system, and the DSP (digital signal processor) circuitry. The tests made in each of the circuits are shown in Tables 6–2, 6–3, and 6–4. These tests are all run at power-on in V1.0/V1.01 firmware unless they are intentionally bypassed by the user. They are skipped in V1.02 firmware unless they are specifically selected by the user.
Diagnostics Table 6–3: Display diagnostic (LL) Test measmt unit min max result Video ASIC –Pass– Video RAM –Pass– Video Interrupt –Pass– Int’l Brite DAC –Pass– Ext’l Brite DAC –Pass– Int’l RAM DAC –Pass– Ext’l RAM DAC –Pass– Table 6–4: DSP diagnostic (LL) Test measmt unit min max result DSP Addr Hold Reg - –Pass– DSP Host Interface –Pass– DSP Host Interrupt –Pass– DSP Internal RAM –Pass– Table 6–5: Digital audio diagnostic (LL) Test measmt unit min max result Host In
Diagnostics The tests for the floppy drive require user interaction. A 3 1/2 inch diskette must be inserted to perform the testing done. As the Table 6–7 indicates, a formatted disk can be queried to check its status. The status query returns the number of heads, the number of tracks, the sectors per track, the bytes per track, the number of sectors, and the bytes per sector for the disk. You can also format a diskette for MS DOS 1.
Diagnostics Low Level Diagnostic Interface --- LOW LEVEL DIAGNOSTICS--Select an OVERALL RUN MODE from the list below: Key Selection __________________________________ P ... -POWER-UP- Mode A ... -AUTO-RESET- Mode C ... -CUSTOM- Mode __________________________________ = ... Reprint @ ...
Diagnostics Low Level Diagnostic Interface --- CPU Diagnostic (LL) --Configure CUSTOM RUN MODE parameters as desired, build/edit sequence, then select RUN" to begin execution Key Selection __________________________________ S ... -SEQUENCE- Type (CUSTOM) 1 ... Advance Mode (MANUAL) 2 ... Result Display Mode (SHOW ALL) B ... -BUILD- New Test Sequence R ... -RUN- Test Sequence __________________________________ = ... Reprint @ ...
Diagnostics Low Level Diagnostic Interface --- Display Diagnostic (LL) --Build a new CUSTOM TEST SEQUENCE by selecting test from those listed. Key Selects/Unselects __________________________________ A ... Video ASIC B ... Video RAM C ... Video Interrupt D ... Int'l Brite DAC E ... Ext'l Brite DAC F ... Int'l RAM DAC G ... Ext'l RAM DAC __________________________________ = ... Reprint @ ... Abort Menu + ... Select All - ... Un-Sel All ! ...
Diagnostics Using a Keyboard to Run Diagnostics The AM700 supports the use of AT-type keyboard as an input device for making any inputs normally accepted from the front panel keypad. For diagnostics, the keyboard is used together with exporting the diagnostic output messages to an external terminal.
Diagnostics Diagnostic Help Menu One of the menu choices in the AM700 START UP MENU is the diagnostic help menu. The help menu has two choices: List special instrument power up modes and list diagnostic front panel button uses. Figure 6–16 lists the front panel buttons that can be used directly to make menu selections. These keystrokes are in lieu of highlighting the menu choice and pressing the Select button when one of the listed key choices is available in a menu.
Diagnostics Low Level Diagnostic Interface SPECIAL INSTRUMENT POWER-UP MODES ================================== These modes are accessed by powering up the instrument with the indicated button(s) held in. The instrument will beep twice and recognize the mode about 5 seconds after power-up, after which the buttons must be released. The Boot Switches MUST be set to default (all closed) to access these modes. POWER-UP MODES BUTTON(S) TO HOLD IN ------------------------------------------DIAGNOSTIC HELP .......
Diagnostics Viewing Diagnostics on a Remote Terminal To view the diagnostics results on an external terminal, section 3 of switch S2 on the CPU board, must be in the open position. This routes the diagnostic output to the serial ports. A terminal or PC with terminal emulation must be connected to either COM1 (serial port 0) or COM2 (serial port 1), and the baud rate of the AM700 must be set to match that of the terminal (see Table 6–8).
Diagnostics Exception errors occurring during step 1 (Address space probe) will: Display an error message sequence on the Diagnostic LED display,decoded as follows: An “E” will precede the exception number (0–255). A “P” will precede the Probe step number (see Table 6–9). Numbers are shown as a sequence of decimal digits, separated by decimal points (to allow detecting repetition of digits), most significant digit to least significant.
Diagnostics Do a warm, quick reboot (skips RAM and ROM tests).
Diagnostics Table 6–9: Bus probe checks (cont.
Diagnostics BOOT Steps The following is a description of the boot diagnostic steps that are performed at power up. In normal operation, these steps happen very rapidly, and the step numbers will not be in the LED long enough to determine the boot step that is occurring. If the boot steps hang so that a number is visible, that number indicates the boot step that hung the processor.
Diagnostics l. If any “critical” errors occur, jump back to the startup code. 2. Read the DRAM size bits from the Board Status Register (BSR). a. Encode the 8-bit boot step number into the USP LSByte. b. Write “2” on the diagnostic LED display. c. Read the DRAM size bits from the Board Status Register. 3. Initialize the DRAM controller. a. Encode the 8-bit boot step number into the USP LSByte. b. Write “3” on the diagnostic LED display. c.
Diagnostics 4. Read boot diagnostic status from the DRAM. a. Encode the 8-bit boot step number into the USP LSByte. b. Write “4” on the diagnostic LED display. c. Read the boot diagnostics status from DRAM. Since a location that may not yet have been written is being read, we could get a parity induced access error (exception 2) here if the Board Program Register fails to mask parity exceptions. There may also be a bus error induced access error on the read.
Diagnostics f. If any bad data lines were found, jump back to the startup code. If there is an access error on this step, it will likely be caused by a write access; it is also possible to get parity induced access errors here, if the Board Program Register fails to mask them. 6. Test the DRAM address bus. a. Encode the 8-bit boot step number into the USP LSByte. b. Write “6” on the diagnostic LED display. c.
Diagnostics e. Write 0xFFFFFFFF to the first and last DRAM location. 0x30000000 is first 0x3XXffffc is last, where: XX is 07 if 8 Meg XX is 0f if 16 Meg XX is 1f if 32 Meg f. Check each of the zeroed locations for non-zero content. A non-zero content indicates a misdirected write. g. Indicate bad address lines by showing “A” and then the hex char “0”–”F” (0–31) on the diagnostic LED display. h. After all lines have been tested, if any of address A2 through A20 failed, jump back to the startup code. i.
Diagnostics 8. Move stack and frame pointers to the DRAM. a. Encode the 8-bit boot step number into the USP LSByte. b. Write “8” on the diagnostic LED display. c. Set registers SP and a6 to the BOOT STACK PTR in DRAM (0x3015fffc if DL’d code; else 0x301fffc). 9. If not skipping, test Boot ROM CRC. a. Encode the 8-bit boot step number into the USP LSByte. b. Write “9” on the diagnostic LED display. c. Calculate a 32-bit CRC for all but the last long word of Boot ROM and compare the value to the last word.
Diagnostics 13. Boot according to application-specific modes. a. Write “D” on the diagnostic LED display. b. Write 13 to step code (in Boot RAM). c. If BootInfo–>flashStat says to try starting upgraded code from flash: If the upgraded code starts up, it will do boot steps 14 through 19. If it fails to startup because the flash was bad, it will signal by flashing the step code (“D”) twice on the diagnostic LED display.
Diagnostics 16. Set I/O mode and initialize the I/O interface hardware. a. Write “.0” on the diagnostic LED display. b. Write 16 to step code (in Boot RAM). c. Set the Dio Infc to use the appropriate I/O mode. d. Call the Dio Infc initialization function to setup the I/O hardware. 17. Initialize the smart exception handler. a. Write “.1” on the diagnostic LED display. b. Write 17 to step code (in Boot RAM). c. Switch exception vector handling from the dumb handler to the smart one. d.
Diagnostics Table 6–11: Digital audio circuit board testing Test name Test description Test Group 0 Check power supplies (three terminal regulator outputs) and adjust 12.288 MHz crystal oscillator Y1. Test Group 1 These are low level tests, mostly read and write tests of all writeable registers. 1.1 host_com Downloads tap 6.56k. Requires functioning dsp kernel and host port Dsp kernel includes: +5 V through fuse F3 DSPCLK 3.072 MHz from U115 pin 19 U115 pin 13 12.
Diagnostics Table 6–11: Digital audio circuit board testing (cont.) Test name Test description Test group 2 Generator adjustments and functional checks. 2.1 adj_synth_1 Locks pll 1 to 12.288 MHz. Operator adjusts L5 to give correct vco control voltage. Pll 1 consists of programmable synthesizer U81, error amplifier U39B, resonant tank CR16/L5, and oscillator IC U78. This is the first pll of the frequency offset circuit. OFFSET_IN is 12.288 MHz from Y1, through U115 pin 5 and U114 pin 36.
Diagnostics Table 6–11: Digital audio circuit board testing (cont.) Test name Test description Test group 2 Generator adjustments and functional checks. 2.6 adj_gen_pll The generator pll consists of a phase comparator contained in U105, error amp U21B, integrator U21A, resonant tank Cr9/L1 and oscillator IC U64. Jitter dac U103 changes the lock phase by injecting an analog offset into the error amp input.
Diagnostics Table 6–11: Digital audio circuit board testing (cont.) Test name Test description Test group 2 Generator adjustments and functional checks. 2.10 adj_gen_lvl This test sets the generator for normal operation while the operator adjusts R483, GEN LEVEL for 1 Vpp output into 75 ohms. R483 sets the reference level on gain dac U107. This sets the current in the Q7/Q8 switch and thus the voltage swing on R246.
Diagnostics Table 6–11: Digital audio circuit board testing (cont.) Test name Test description Test group 3 Receiver tests, Generator tests which require the receiver. 3.3 input_level_linearity This test checks the accuracy of the input level measurement circuit described in 3.2 above for all external inputs, and at several amplitude levels. Same description as 3.2 above. These considerations apply to 3.
Diagnostics Table 6–11: Digital audio circuit board testing (cont.) Test name Test description Test group 3 Receiver tests, Generator tests which require the receiver. 3.7 eq_level_test This test internally connects the generator to the receiver and checks static operation of the equalizer with the generator’s cable simulator off and then on. The equalizer’s input is the agc’d input signal from TP3.
Diagnostics Table 6–11: Digital audio circuit board testing (cont.) Test name Test description Test group 3 Receiver tests, Generator tests which require the receiver. 3.11 ej_path_test This test internally connects the generator to the receiver and checks that a fixed level of generated jitter is detected by the receiver’s eye/jitter loop. A large jitter level is checked with jitter gain set to 1, and a smaller level is checked with jitter gain set to 8.
Board Exchange Program For service, parts, module exchange, returns, or technical support, customers with 1-800 dialing access can call Tektronix Customer Service between 8:00 AM and 5:00 PM Pacific Time (west coast, USA), Monday through Friday at the following telephone number: 1-800-TEK-WIDE Customer Service personnel will direct your inquiry to the proper support group.
Board Exchange Program 3. The module has been modified by the customer. 4. The module has been custom modified to the customer’s specification by Tektronix. 5. The module requested in not in the module exchange program. In any of these cases, you will have to order a new replacement module at the full catalog price. Call your local Tektronix field office for further information. Locating Exchange Information The following paragraphs are intended to assist in ordering the exact circuit board replacement.
Board Exchange Program A7 DSP board A6 Main/CPU board A12 Disk Drive A4 Rear Panel board A10 Picture Monitor board A3 Digital Audio board A5 Generator board A11 Power Supply board A1 Analog Acquisition board A9 Front Panel board A2 XLR Connector board Figure 6–19: Circuit board assemblies for CRT display version AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 6–51
Board Exchange Program A13 LCD Display Driver board A7 DSP board A6 Main/CPU board A12 Disk Drive A14 Flat Panel Display assembly A4 Rear Panel board A3 Digital Audio board A5 Generator board A11 Power Supply board A9 Front Panel board A2 XLR Connector board A1 Analog Acquisition board Figure 6–20: Circuit board assemblies for flat panel color display 6–52 AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Board Exchange Program Having the correct assembly name, number, and Tektronix part number information plus the instrument type, installed options, serial number, and software version number (if known) ensures that you will receive the correct replacement module for your instrument. Tektronix Service Offerings Tektronix maintains a service organization that can provide a number of services to assist in maintaining the instrument’s operation at its specified levels.
Board Exchange Program 6–54 AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures This section provides a tool list and instructions required to remove modules within the instrument. All module and board removal procedures assume that the instrument cover has been removed. All work should be done at an approved work bench for static-damage prevention.
Removal and Replacement Procedures CAUTION. In step 4, when the instrument cover is replaced it can cause damage to both cables and components. To avoid damaging parts, replace the cover slowly and without force, making sure all cables and components are cleared as the cover is lowered into place. Keep the cover evenly aligned with the chassis as it goes on. 4. Start the cover evenly on all sides of the rear panel.
Removal and Replacement Procedures The catches are also extracting levers, and they disengage the connector from the pins in the connector housing. To reconnect, align the connector with the pins in the housing and press firmly to seat the connector. The catches should snap into place when the connector is fully inserted. Press the catches together to ensure that they are completely engaged over the top of the connector.
Removal and Replacement Procedures A13 LCD Display Driver A6 Main/CPU A7 DSP A4 Rear panel A12 Disk drive A3 Digital audio A11 Power supply A14 Flat panel display assembly A5 Audio generator A1 Analog acquisition A9 Front panel A2 XLR Connector Figure 6–23: Major module locations for the LCD flat panel display Analog Acquisition (A1) Removal/Replacement 6–58 1. Place the AM700 top down. 2.
Removal and Replacement Procedures J13 Analog Audio Generator J17 J14 J16 J1 XLR Connector J29 Analog Acquisition Hybrid retaining clip J2 J27 J10 J30 J25 Trigger Input Connector J28 J26 J11 Remove this standoff post Figure 6–24: Bottom view showing the connections to the Analog Acquisition board 3. Disconnect all cables connected to the Analog Acquisition board.
Removal and Replacement Procedures 4. Remove one screw and the five standoffs securing the board. (Note: The CRT display instruments have six screws and no standoffs holding the board in place.) 5. Remove the screw from the metal standoff post holding the hybrid retaining clip. Remove the metal standoff post using a 5/16-inch nutdriver and remove the plastic screws and shoulder washer from the metal standoff post near TP28. Do not remove the standoff post. 6.
Removal and Replacement Procedures Slot PUSH Figure 6–25: XLR connectors 5. Gently pull the XLR board away from the front panel to extract the connectors from the connector housings. 6. Disconnect the Analog Audio Generator interconnection cables to the XLR connector board at J8 CH B and J9 CH A. Reverse the procedure to install the XLR Connector board. CAUTION.
Removal and Replacement Procedures J8 J9 Analog Audio Generator J1 J7 XLR Connector J8 Analog Acquisition J2 J9 J10 J11 Figure 6–26: Bottom view showing the XLR connector board cable connections Hint: Move the rear of the XLR board up and down slightly and visually verify that the connector being locked does not move. (It is locked to the connector housing when it no longer moves with the circuit board.) 10. Reconnect the XLR to Digital Audio board connector.
Removal and Replacement Procedures Digital Audio (A3) Removal/Replacement 1. Remove the DSP (A7) and CPU (A6) boards. 2. Disconnect all cables connected to the Digital Audio board.
Removal and Replacement Procedures Rear Panel (A4) Removal/Replacement 1. Remove the four T15 Torx screws the hold the rear panel assembly to the main chassis. 2. Pull the rear panel assembly out of the recess far enough to disconnect the ribbon cable from the rear panel connector, J2, and extract the assembly. 3. Reverse the procedure to reinstall the Rear Panel assembly. Analog Audio Generator Board (A5) Removal/Replacement 1. Place the AM700 top down. 2.
Removal and Replacement Procedures J30 J9 J27 Analog Acquisition J8 XLR Connector J29 J16 J14 J17 Analog Audio Generator J9 J8 J13 Figure 6–28: Bottom view showing the Analog Audio Generator cabling Reverse the procedure to reinstall the Audio Generator Board. 4. Position the Audio Generator board and replace the screws that hold the board to the chassis. 5. Reconnect the cables disconnected in step 2. LCD Display Driver (A13) Removal/Replacement (Flat Panel Display Version) 1.
Removal and Replacement Procedures Reverse the procedure to reinstall the LCD Display Driver board. 6. Position the LCD Display Driver board carefully over the standoffs for the retaining screws. 7. Align the pins of the interboard connector between the LCD Display Driver and the CPU board. 8. Carefully push the LCD Display Driver down to fully engage the connector pins. 9. Reinstall the two screws that hold the LCD Display Driver board to the standoffs on the CPU board. 10.
Removal and Replacement Procedures CABLE CONNECTORS: J42 Disk drive flexible circuit board cable (see Figure 6–36 on page 6–72) J8 Ribbon cable connector at rear of board J48 Small ribbon cable connector at front of board J50 Large ribbon cable connector at front of board J53 Ribbon cable connector at right rear of board J31 and J33 Power connectors at right side of board Release bar Remove these screws.
Removal and Replacement Procedures 4. A total of eight screws need to be removed. Five screws are found on the rear panel; see Figure 6–31. The remaining three screws are on the board in close proximity to the fan. CPU Screws Figure 6–31: Rear panel screws holding the CPU board in place 5. Slide the board approximately 1/8-inch towards the front of the instrument so that it clears the six plastic latches. Lift the board off of the instrument. Reverse the procedure to install the board. 6.
Removal and Replacement Procedures DSP (A7) Removal/Replacement 1. Place the AM700 bottom down. 2. Disconnect the ribbon cable (at J1) from the DSP board. 3. Remove the seven screws securing the board with a T-15 Torx screwdriver. See Figure 6–32 for screw locations. J300 J1 Figure 6–32: Retaining screw locations for DSP (A7) circuit board 4. Lift the DSP board away from the the CPU board to disconnect the interboard connector, J300, from J36 on the CPU board.
Removal and Replacement Procedures Figure 6–33: Trim ring and front panel removal 4. Pull the Front Panel assembly out far enough to disconnect the ribbon cable connector, J1, on the bottom of the assembly; the flexible circuit board connector (to the touch screen), J4, on the left side of the circuit board (looking from the front); and the headphone cable, at J6. See Figure 6–34 for connector locations on the circuit board. NOTE.
Removal and Replacement Procedures Reverse the procedure to reinstall the Front Panel assembly. 5. Position the Front Panel assembly in the front-panel casting and reconnect the touch screen connector at J4 on the Front Panel board, the Front Panel ribbon cable connector to J50 on the CPU board, and the headphone cable connector at J6. 6. After reinstalling the Front Panel assembly into the front-panel casting, reinstall the XLR bezel.
Removal and Replacement Procedures Disk Drive (A12) Removal/Replacement 1. Release the disk drive flexible circuit board connector on the CPU board. See Figure 6–36 for the connector operation. NOTE. Do not pull on the cable to force it out of the connector. This will weaken the connection. Lift the connector release bar from its ends to loosen the cable. Press the release bar down to lock the cable to the connector. Figure 6–36: Disk drive flexible circuit board connector operation 2.
Removal and Replacement Procedures Touch Screen Removal/Replacement for CRT Display Instruments 1. Remove the front panel trim ring and the Front-Panel assembly. See the previous Front Panel Removal/Replacement procedure for those instructions. 2. Remove the four T-10 Posidrive screws holding the touch screen to the mounting brackets that are attached to the front casting. 3. Do not touch the rear surface of the touch screen. Keep it clean of fingerprints and dirt for reinstallation. 4.
Removal and Replacement Procedures Figure 6–37: Power supply and monitor board cover plate screws and cables (CRT display version) WARNING. The CRT is fragile and is under a high vacuum. Use a protective face mask for safety when removing the CRT from the instrument. Place the CRT face down on a soft surface in a protected area to prevent accidental breaking of the CRT. CAUTION. Be careful not to bump the connector end of the CRT against the front casting when removing it from the instrument.
Removal and Replacement Procedures CAUTION. The CRT can retain a high-voltage charge for a period of time after operation of the instrument. Use a grounding probe to discharge the highvoltage contact of the CRT before attempting to disconnect it. 9. Ground the lead of a grounding probe to the chassis of the AM700. Slide the probe tip beneath the rubber insulation cup of the high-voltage lead on the CRT.
Removal and Replacement Procedures on the rear panel of the chassis. The ribbon cable at J2 will have to be reconnected if installing a new Display Monitor board. Otherwise it may remain in place throughout the procedure. 5. Reroute and connect the Fan power wires to the Power Supply board at J11. 6. Reinstall the Touch Screen assembly. Do not touch the rear surface of the touch screen. Keep it clean of fingerprints and dirt for reinstallation. 7.
Removal and Replacement Procedures Cable retaining bracket Figure 6–38: Trim ring and LCD flat panel display retaining screws 6. Pull the Front Panel assembly out far enough to disconnect the ribbon cable connector, J1, on the bottom of the assembly; the flexible circuit board connector, J4, on the left side of the circuit board (looking from the front); and the headphone cable, at J6. 7.
Removal and Replacement Procedures 9. Disconnect the cables to the LCD assembly from the display driver board, and remove the LCD assembly from the chassis. Note the dress and routing of the cables for reinstallation. 10. Lift the touch screen with metal frame from the LCD assembly (see Figure 6–39 or Figure 6–40). The touch screen cable is routed under the LCD flat panel and out the side of the shield box. Note the cable routing for reassembly. LCD Flat Panel Handling Precautions.
Removal and Replacement Procedures Figure 6–39: Touch screen assembly removal B020253 to B020692 11. Remove the four screws holding the LCD flat panel to rear shield. The AM700 was manufacuted with two versions of the LCD assembly. See Figure 6–40 for the exploded view of the new version or see Figure 6–41 for the exploded view previous assembly. Note that a ground wire is connected with one of the screws. The newer version flat panel display assembly has several notable differences.
Removal and Replacement Procedures Figure 6–40: Touch screen removal for serial number B020633 and above 6–80 AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures Figure 6–41: LCD assembly exploded view serial number B020100 to B020632 AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 6–81
Removal and Replacement Procedures Replacing the LCD Assembly 1. Place the LCD assembly on the rear shield and align the holes at the corners with the standoffs on the rear shield. Note that the touch screen cable is routed beneath the flat panel display. 2. Reinstall the four screws at the corners and evenly tighten them. 3. Replace the touch screen with metal frame over the LCD panel.
Removal and Replacement Procedures 15. Recheck all the cable connectors for a tight connection. NOTE. You may want to run the instrument at this point to make certain the installation went well, before you put on the cover. 16. Replace the cabinet of the AM700. Refer to Cabinet Removal and Replacement on page 6–55 for more information. LCD Backlight and Backlight Inverter Removal/Replacement 1.
Removal and Replacement Procedures 1 Remove screw. 2 Grasp backlight assembly at both ends. 3 Slide in direction of arrow to release locking tab, then rotate this edge upward.
Removal and Replacement Procedures 10. Repeat for the other backlight. 11. Connect the backlight connectors to the inverter boards (or board for the earlier version). NOTE. Step 12 is not needed for the newer assemblies because it is not necessary to remove the inverter boards to disconnect and reconnect the backlight connectors. Go to step 13. 12. Align the inverter board with the standoffs on the rear shield and install the two screws to reattach the inverter board to the shield. 13.
Removal and Replacement Procedures Grounding wire Slot Note: The touch screen cable comes out the side of the new version of touch screen. Figure 6–43: Touch panel reinstallation Power Supply (A11) Removal/Replacement 1. Remove the DSP board (A7), the Main/CPU board (A6), and the Digital Audio board (A3) (see the removal procedures for each of those boards). 2. Disconnect the Power connectors at the right side of the power supply board. 3.
Removal and Replacement Procedures 5. Disconnect the four connectors at the left front of the power supply board. CONNECTORS: J11 A two-wire connector to the fan. J5 Ribbon cable to J48 on the CPU board. J10 A two-wire connector to the display monitor board J6 A two-wire connector to the Stby/On switch. 6. Use a T-10 Torx screwdriver to remove the five screws holding transistors Q2, Q3, Q6, Q7, and rectifier CR26 to the heat sink on the left side of the power supply board.
Removal and Replacement Procedures NOTE. The EMI line filter is mounted on the power supply board in early versions of the measurement set. The EMI line filter in later versions of the power supply is mounted to the rear panel. 8. Remove the green ground wire attached to the chanssis. 9. Use a 1/4-inch nut driver to remove the two standoff posts in the center area of the board.
Removal and Replacement Procedures Backup battery Figure 6–45: Location of the backup battery in the AM700 Figure 6–46: Partial CPU board showing location of BT1, the backup battery AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 6–89
Removal and Replacement Procedures 6–90 AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Firmware Upgrade Procedure These instructions are used to upgrade the operating firmware stored in EEPROM through the AM700 disk drive when new upgrades are provided. Upgrading takes approximately 15 minutes to complete. The upgrade firmware is provided on three 3 1/2 inch diskettes.
Firmware Upgrade Procedure 10. Follow the instructions that appear on the AM700 screen to complete the reprogramming procedure. 11. Press Enter or Sweep/Run to continue, or press Clear Menu to stop the upgrade procedure. You will need Disk #1 and Disk #2 ready to insert when asked to do so. Each disk is read and verified before the firmware is upgraded. If an error occurs while reading the upgrade data disks, the upgrade procedure is terminated without changing the loaded firmware. 12.
Rack Adapter Instructions The AM7FR1 Rackmounting adapter enables mounting the Tektronix AM700 Audio Measurement Set in a standard 19-inch (483 mm) rack with an 8.75 inch vertical opening (five rack units). The adapter consists of a folded metal tray with attached front panel and slide-out assemblies. CAUTION. To prevent static discharge damage, service the measurement set only in an antistatic work station. Observe standard handling precautions for static-sensitive devices while installing this kit.
Rack Adapter Instructions Extra hardware is provided with the slide-out track assemblies. Since the hardware is intended to make the tracks compatible with a variety of cabinet racks and installation methods, not all of the hardware will be used for any installation procedure.
Rack Adapter Instructions Installation Procedure The following procedure describes how to attach the stationary section to untapped rack rails using the hardware provided, adjust the slide-out track alignment, and mount the rack-adapted instrument in the cabinet rack. If the rack rails are tapped for 10-32 screws, the slide-out tracks can be mounted in front of the front rails and in back of the rear rack rails using pan head screws. The flat bar nuts are not needed. 0.500 in. 1.75 in.
Rack Adapter Instructions Front rack rail Bar nut (use if front rack rail is not tapped) 10-32 PHS screws Figure 6–49: Mounting the slide to the front rail 3. Mount the stationary sections to the rear rails on the equipment rack using mounting holes in the rear rails that correspond to the same level as the front rail holes selected in step 1. If the rear-rail mounting holes are tapped, the bar nut is not used to attach the extensions.
Rack Adapter Instructions 5. Insert the chassis sections attached to the AM7FR1 rack adapter into the intermediate sections. 6. Press both stop latches, and push the adapter into the cabinet rack until the latches snap into the stop latch holes. 7. Adjust the alignment of the stationary sections according to the following procedure. a. Loosen the mounting screws at the front of both stationary sections. b. Allow the tracks to seek their normal positions with the adapter centered in the rack. c.
Rack Adapter Instructions Figure 6–51: Removing the plastic handle screw cover NOTE. If reinstalling the handle to the AM700, this screw must be firmly tightened to prevent the handle crosspiece from rotating with respect to the handle swing arm. 5. Using either a PoziDriveR screwdriver with P2 cross-tip bit or a 3 mm hexagonal wrench, as necessary, loosen several turns, but do not remove the screw that holds the handle to the swing arm.
Rack Adapter Instructions Figure 6–52: Removing the thumb release button from the swing arm CAUTION. Do not reinsert the swing handle screws in the cabinet screw holes; they are too long and will damage internal components. 8. Using a TorxR screwdriver with T15 bit, remove the screws and washers, as shown in Figure 6–53, that hold both swing arms to the cabinet of the measurement set. 9.
Rack Adapter Instructions Figure 6–53: Removing the retaining screws holding the swing arms to the cabinet 11. Pull the rack adapter to its full extension. 12. Place the AM700 into the adapter and position it fully forward to align the holes in the sides of the adapter with the handle holes of the measurement set. CAUTION. Do not use the long screws removed from the measurement set to attach the adapter. The long screws can damage the internal components. 13.
Rack Adapter Instructions Removing the Measurement Set from the Rack The rackmounted measurement set and adapter may be easily removed from the rack. The slide-out tracks permit the rack-adapted AM700 to be extended out of the rack for access to the rear-panel connectors. Before attempting to operate the instrument in the extended position, be sure the power cord and any other connected cabling is long enough to permit full extension. 1.
Rack Adapter Instructions Manufacturers cross index Mfr.
Rack Adapter Instructions 3 2 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Figure 6–55: Exploded view of the rack adapter assembly AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 6–103
Rack Adapter Instructions 6–104 AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Options The current options for the AM700 consist of the power cord options: A1, A2, A3, and A5 plus two servicing options: M2 and M9. The power cord options are described in Table 1–1 of the Specification section. Servicing option M2 provides for remedial service support and Servicing option M9 is a repair protection plan. For those owners that want to change from the CRT display to the flat-panel color display, there is a option to purchase a factory upgrade to install the color display.
Options 7–2 AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts This section contains a list of the electrical components for the . Use this list to identify and order replacement parts. Parts Ordering Information Replacement parts are available through your local Tektronix field office or representative. Changes to Tektronix products are sometimes made to accommodate improved components as they become available and to give you the benefit of the latest improvements.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Parts list column descriptions Column Column name Description 1 Component number The component number appears on diagrams and circuit board illustrations, located in the diagrams section. Assembly numbers are clearly marked on each diagram and circuit board illustration in the Diagrams section, and on the mechanical exploded views in the Replaceable Mechanical Parts list section.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Manufacturers cross index Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Manufacturers cross index (cont.) Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Manufacturers cross index (cont.) Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Manufacturers cross index (cont.) Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Manufacturers cross index (cont.) Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Manufacturers cross index (cont.) Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Electrical Parts List Component number Tektronix part number A1A1 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Electrical Parts List (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list Component number Tektronix part number A1A1 671–2897–00 A1A1 671–2897–01 Serial no. effective B020100 Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number B019999 CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ACQUISITION 80009 671289700 CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ACQUISITION 80009 671289701 *ATTACHED PARTS* 129–0565–00 SPACER,POST:1.281 L,6–32,AL,0.312 HEX (QUANTITY 2) 80009 129056500 162–0532–00 INSUL SLVG,ELEC:HT SHRINK,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A1A1C108 283–0642–01 A1A1C109 A1A1C110 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A1A1C206 281–0775–02 A1A1C207 A1A1C208 A1A1C209 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265 04222 SA205C104MAA 283–0680–00 CAP,FXD,MICA DI:330PF,1%,500V TK0891 RDM15FD331F03 283–0605–01 CAP,FXD,MICA DI:678PF,1%,300V 09023 CDA15FC(678)F03 281–0775–02 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A1A1C247 281–0775–02 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265 04222 SA205C104MAA UPL1H100MDH1TD A1A1C248 290–1311–00 CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C) 55680 A1A1C249 285–1342–00 CAP,FXD,PLASTIC:FILM & FOIL;220PF,5%,100V,7.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code A1A1C295 290–1311–00 Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C) 55680 UPL1H100MDH1TD A1A1C296 290–1311–00 CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C) 55680 UPL1H100MDH1TD A1A1C297 281–0775–02 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A1A1C333 281–0158–00 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A1A1CR35 152–0141–02 A1A1CR36 A1A1CR39 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A1A1K7 148–0235–00 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A1A1R33 321–0603–07 A1A1R34 A1A1R35 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD,FILM:15K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI 19701 5033RE15K00B 321–0603–07 RES,FXD,FILM:15K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI 19701 5033RE15K00B 321–0222–07 RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A1A1R138 321–0222–07 A1A1R139 A1A1R140 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI 19701 5033RE2K000B 321–0222–07 RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI 19701 5033RE2K000B 321–0263–00 RES,FXD,FILM:5.36K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0MI 19701 5043ED5K360F A1A1R141 321–0222–07 RES,FXD,FILM:2.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A1A1R242 322–3058–00 A1A1R243 A1A1R244 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:METAL FILM;39.2 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CCF50–1G39R20F 322–3322–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;22.1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 91637 CCF501G22101F 322–3402–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;150K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code A1A1R302 308–0736–00 Mfr. part number RES,FXD,WW:200 OHM,1%,3W 91637 RS2B–B200R0F T/ A1A1R303 322–3097–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CCF501G100R0F A1A1R304 322–3423–00 RES,FXD,FILM:249K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A1A1R341 322–3193–00 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CCF501G10000F A1A1R342 322–3206–00 RES,FXD,FILM:1.37K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY 91637 CCF501G13700F A1A1TP2 214–4085–00 TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A1A1TP45 214–4085–00 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB 26364 104–01–02 A1A1TP46 214–4085–00 TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB 26364 104–01–02 A1A1TP47 214–4085–00 TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB 26364 104–01–02 A1A1TP48 214–4085–00 TERM,TEST POINT:0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A1A1U58 156–4413–00 A1A1U59 A1A1U60 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A1A1VR1 152–0514–00 A1A1VR2 A1A1VR3 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number DIODE,ZENER:10V,1%,0.4W 04713 MZ4104D 152–0514–00 DIODE,ZENER:10V,1%,0.4W 04713 MZ4104D 152–0514–00 DIODE,ZENER:10V,1%,0.4W 04713 MZ4104D A1A1VR4 152–0514–00 DIODE,ZENER:10V,1%,0.4W 04713 MZ4104D A1A1VR5 152–0395–00 DIODE,ZENER:4.3V,5%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code A1A3R54 321–0077–00 Mfr. part number RES,FXD,FILM:61.9 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0MI 57668 CRRB14 FXE 61.9 A1A3R281 321–0210–07 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.5K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=25 PPM 91637 CMF55116C15000B A1A3R282 321–0077–00 RES,FXD,FILM:61.9 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0MI 57668 CRRB14 FXE 61.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code A1A6C293 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A1A7R22 321–5032–00 A1A7R23 A1A7R24 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:THICK FILM;15.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK1502FT 321–5032–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM;15.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK1502FT 321–5032–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM;15.0K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list Component number Tektronix part number A2 671–2917–00 A2 671–2917–01 Serial no. effective 11/18/94 Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CIRCUIT BD ASSY:XLR 80009 671–2917–00 CIRCUIT BD ASSY:XLR 80009 671–2917–01 337310400 *ATTACHED PARTS* 337–3104–00 SHIELD,ELEC:CKT BD (QUANTITY 3) 80009 343–0549–00 STRAP,TIEDOWN,E:0.098 W X 4.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A2R3 322–3050–00 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD,FILM:32.4 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL 91637 CCF501G32R40F A2R4 322–3050–00 RES,FXD,FILM:32.4 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL 91637 CCF501G32R40F A2T1 120–1933–00 TRANSFORMER,SIG:WIDEBAND;0.02–100MHZ,INSERT 15542 T 1.
Replaceable electrical parts list Component number Tektronix part number A3 671–2915–00 Serial no. effective A3 671–2915–01 B010249 A3 671–2915–02 B010422 Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A3C56 281–0775–01 A3C57 A3C61 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170 04222 SA105E104MAA 281–0775–01 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170 04222 SA105E104MAA 281–0775–01 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170 04222 SA105E104MAA A3C62 281–0775–01 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A3C106 281–0775–01 A3C107 A3C108 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170 04222 SA105E104MAA 281–0775–01 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170 04222 SA105E104MAA 281–0775–01 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170 04222 SA105E104MAA A3C109 281–0775–01 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A3C147 281–0775–01 A3C148 A3C149 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170 04222 SA105E104MAA 281–0775–01 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170 04222 SA105E104MAA 281–0775–01 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170 04222 SA105E104MAA A3C150 285–1338–00 CAP,FXD,MTLZD:1.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A3C190 283–0594–02 A3C191 A3C192 Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,MICA DI:1000PF,1%,100V,T&A 09023 CDA15FA102F03 283–0594–02 CAP,FXD,MICA DI:1000PF,1%,100V,T&A 09023 CDA15FA102F03 281–0775–01 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170 04222 SA105E104MAA A3C193 281–0775–01 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A3C236 281–0791–00 A3C237 A3C238 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;270PF,10%,100V,0.100 X0.170 04222 SA102C271KAA 285–1378–01 CAP,FXD,PLSTC:MTLZD FILM;0.1UF,20%,63V,POLYESTER TK1913 MKS33 0.1/63/20 285–1378–01 CAP,FXD,PLSTC:MTLZD FILM;0.1UF,20%,63V,POLYESTER TK1913 MKS33 0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective A3C274 290–0524–01 B010249 A3CR3 A3CR7 Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,TANT:4.7UF,20%,10V, RADIAL 2N936 199D475X0010AB1 152–0951–00 DIODE,SIG:SCHTKY;60V,2.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A3L6 108–1243–00 A3L7 114–0494–00 A3L8 108–1243–00 A3L10 108–1263–00 A3L11 108–1263–00 A3L13 108–1263–00 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d B010248 B010248 Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number INDUCTOR,FXD:SIGNAL;27UH,2%,IDC<135 MA,RDC<3.5 OHM 24226 ML10–272G INDUCTOR,VAR:SIGNAL,SHIELDED;2.2–3.2UH,RDC<0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A3R3 307–0383–00 A3R5 A3R6 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES NTWK,FXD,FI:13,4.7K OHM,2%,0.25W 91637 MDP14–01–472G 322–3201–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 91637 CCF501G12100F 322–3201–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 91637 CCF501G12100F A3R7 322–3201–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.21K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A3R162 322–3051–00 A3R165 A3R166 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:METAL FILM;33.2 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM 57668 CRB20FXE33E2 321–0185–07 RES,FXD,FILM:825 OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 57027 RC55–D–825R0–B– 321–0126–07 RES,FXD,FILM:200 OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI 19701 5033RE200R0B A3R170 322–3165–00 RES,FXD,FILM:511 OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A3R235 322–3097–00 A3R236 A3R238 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CCF501G100R0F 322–3114–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;150 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CCF50–2–G1500F 322–3193–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A3R307 322–3485–00 A3R315 A3R316 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO,SMALL BODY 91637 CCF501G50000F 322–3485–00 RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO,SMALL BODY 91637 CCF501G50000F 322–3485–00 RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A3R358 322–3154–00 A3R361 A3R362 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:METAL FILM;392 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CCF501G392R0F 322–3154–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;392 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CCF501G392R0F 322–3154–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;392 OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A3R409 322–3066–00 A3R411 A3R412 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM 09969 CCF502G47R50F 322–3051–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;33.2 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM 57668 CRB20FXE33E2 322–3289–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A3R453 322–3051–00 A3R454 A3R455 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:METAL FILM;33.2 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM 57668 CRB20FXE33E2 322–3193–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CCF501G10000F 322–3485–00 RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A3R492 322–3154–00 A3R493 A3R494 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:METAL FILM;392 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CCF501G392R0F 322–3218–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.82K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 91637 CCF501G18200F 322–3030–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;20 OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Name & description Mfr. part number *END MOUNTING PARTS* A3U21 156–2873–00 IC,LINEAR:BIFET,OP–AMP;DUAL 04713 MC34082P A3U39 156–3095–00 IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;DUAL,0.8MV VOS,30NA IB 64155 LT1013CN8 A3U59 160–9863–00 IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;EEPLD,26V12,20NS,105MA 80009 160–9863–00 136–1038–00 SOCKET,DIP:PCB;STR,28 POS,2 X 14,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code 136–1047–00 SKT,PLCC:PCB;44 POS,0.05 CTR,0.360H X 0.125 TAIL,TIN 00779 821575–1 A3U103 156–1638–00 IC,CONVERTER:BIPOLAR,D/A;10 BIT,150NS,CURRENT OUT 24355 DAC10GP A3U104 160–9866–00 IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;EEPLD,MACH 210,64 M/C,32 I/O,6 IN 80009 160–9866–00 136–1047–00 SOCKET,PLCC:PCB;44 POS,0.05 CTR,0.360H X 0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code A3U118 156–3063–00 Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective A3U150 156–1150–01 B010249 A3VR1 152–0166–00 Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,VOLTAGE REGULATOR,NEGATIVE,–5.0V,100MA,4%,MC79L05ACP,TO–92 04713 MC79L05ACPRP DIODE,ZENER:6.2V,5%,0.4W 04713 1N5995BRL Name & description A3VR2 152–0226–00 B010248 DIODE,ZENER:5.1V,5%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list Component number Tektronix part number A4 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number 671–2916–00 CIRCUIT BD ASSY:REAR PANEL 80009 671291600 333–4109–00 PANEL,REAR:AES,AM700 80009 333410900 A4C1 281–0775–01 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170 04222 SA105E104MAA A4C2 281–0775–01 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A4J6 131–5678–00 A4J7 131–5679–00 A4L1 108–1263–00 A4L2 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CONN:TORX176 80009 131567800 CONN:TOTX176 80009 131567900 INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER;10UH,10%,I<2.1A,RDC<0.043 OHM,Q>20,SRF>19MHZ,BOBBIN TK2058 TSL0707–100K1R9 108–1263–00 INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER;10UH,10%,I<2.1A,RDC<0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list Component number Tektronix part number A5 671–2797–00 Serial no. effective A5 671–2797–01 B010330 A5 671–2797–02 B020100 Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5C32 290–5039–00 A5C33 A5C34 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,6.3MM,SMD,16MM 62643 MVK50VC10RMF60TPX 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM 04222 12063C104KAT3A 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM 04222 12063C104KAT3A A5C35 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5C68 283–5004–00 A5C69 A5C70 Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM 04222 12063C104KAT3A 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM 04222 12063C104KAT3A 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM 04222 12063C104KAT3A A5C71 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code A5C151 283–5004–00 Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM 04222 12063C104KAT3A A5C152 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM 04222 12063C104KAT3A A5C300 290–1069–00 B020100 CAP,FXD,ALUM:1000UF,20%, 25V,ESR=0.23 OHM (120HZ,20C),12.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5C341 283–5004–00 A5C342 A5C343 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM 04222 12063C104KAT3A 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM 04222 12063C104KAT3A 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM 04222 12063C104KAT3A A5C344 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective A5C381 283–0139–00 B020642 A5C381 283–0330–00 A5C382 Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,150PF,10%,50V,COG,0.138 X 0.120,RADIAL,BULK 04222 SR15A151KAT B020642 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:100PF,5%,50V,0.200 X 0.200,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5C410 283–5004–00 A5C412 A5C415 Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM 04222 12063C104KAT3A 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM 04222 12063C104KAT3A 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM 04222 12063C104KAT3A A5C416 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5C451 283–5025–00 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO,8MM 04222 12065A221JAT1A A5C452 283–5025–00 CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO,8MM 04222 12065A221JAT1A A5C453 283–5098–00 CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,+80%–20%,50V,Z5U,8MM 04222 12065E104ZAT3A A5C454 283–5098–00 CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number 75915 251004 80009 129022200 75915 251004 80009 129022200 *END ATTACHED PARTS* A5F13 159–0363–00 FUSE,WIRE LEAD:4A,125V,FAST BLOW,ULREC,CSA CERT, *ATTACHED PARTS* 129–0222–00 SPACER,POST:0.27 L,4–40 THRU,PLSTC,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5K2 148–1023–00 A5K3 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C,220V, 1A, 30W, COIL 5V, 178 OHM, .30H X .37W X .56L, SMD, EB2–5NUL TK2601 148–1023–00 148–1023–00 RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C,220V, 1A, 30W, COIL 5V, 178 OHM, .30H X .37W X .56L, SMD, EB2–5NUL TK2601 148–1023–00 A5K4 148–1023–00 RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C,220V, 1A, 30W, COIL 5V, 178 OHM, .
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5Q1 151–5001–00 A5Q2 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5Q19 151–5001–00 A5Q20 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5Q37 151–0590–00 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL, MPSW06,TO–226AE EBC Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5Q53 151–0590–00 A5Q54 151–0591–00 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5R33 321–5122–00 A5R38 A5R43 Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD,FILM:499 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM 91637 CRCW1206–4990F–RT1 321–0193–07 RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 07716 CEAE10000B 321–5305–00 RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM, 0.1%,25PPM,0.125W,1206 PKG 91637 TNPW1206–2001B–RT1 A5R46 321–5305–00 RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM, 0.1%,25PPM,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5R94 321–0054–00 A5R95 A5R96 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD,FILM:35.7 OHM, 0.5%,0.125W,TC=T0 50139 NOT AVAILABLE 321–1008–04 RES,FXD,FILM:12.0 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2 50139 ADVISE 321–1008–04 RES,FXD,FILM:12.0 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2 50139 ADVISE A5R97 321–0095–00 RES,FXD,FILM:95.3 OHM, 1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5R144 321–0222–07 A5R145 A5R146 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 07716 CEAE20000B 321–0222–07 RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 07716 CEAE20000B 321–0222–07 RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 07716 CEAE20000B A5R147 321–0222–07 RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code A5R182 321–5281–00 Mfr. part number RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206 59124 RK73H2B2001FT A5R183 321–5090–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,20.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,100 PPM,1206 50139 BCK2002FT A5R184 321–5018–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5R214 321–5026–00 A5R215 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206 50139 BCK4751FT 321–5388–00 RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM 91637 CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1 A5R216 321–5388–00 RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM 91637 CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1 A5R217 321–5388–00 RES,FXD,FILM:16.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code A5R244 321–5281–00 Mfr. part number RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206 59124 RK73H2B2001FT A5R245 321–5090–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,20.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,100 PPM,1206 50139 BCK2002FT A5R246 321–5018–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5R275 307–5040–01 A5R276 307–5040–01 A5R277 307–5040–01 A5R277 325–0483–00 B020100 A5R278 325–0483–00 B020100 RES,FXD,FILM:300 OHM, 1%, 3 W, 500V,0.515 X 0.225, AXIAL 24546 FP69 300 OHM 1% A5R279 321–5030–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206 50139 BCK1002FT A5R280 321–5030–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM, 1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5R301 321–5026–00 A5R302 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206 50139 BCK4751FT 321–5026–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206 50139 BCK4751FT A5R303 321–5026–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5R324 321–5026–00 A5R325 Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206 50139 BCK4751FT 321–5388–00 RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM 91637 CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1 A5R326 321–5388–00 RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM 91637 CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1 A5R327 321–5388–00 RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5R350 321–5030–00 A5R351 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206 50139 BCK1002FT 321–5006–00 RES,FXD,FILM:THICK FILM,100 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206 50139 BCK1000FT A5R352 321–5006–00 RES,FXD,FILM:THICK FILM,100 OHM, 1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5R375 321–5047–00 A5R376 Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:THICK FILM,100K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206 50139 BCK1003FT 321–5030–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206 50139 BCK1002FT A5R377 321–5000–00 RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,100V,1206,SMD 50139 BCD10R0FT A5R378 321–5000–00 RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM, 1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5TP24 214–4085–00 A5TP25 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X 0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR 26364 TP104–01–02 214–4085–00 TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X 0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR 26364 TP104–01–02 A5TP26 214–4085–00 TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code 211–0008–00 SCREW,MACHINE:4–40 X 0.25,PNH,STL TK0435 ORDER BY DESC 214–3036–00 HEAT SINK,SE C:XSTR,TO–220;ALUM,BLACK ANODIZE 98978 7–363–BA 342–0355–00 INSULATOR,PLATE:TRANSISTOR,SILICONE RUBBER 2K262 CHR–1869 Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5U46 156–6706–00 A5U47 Serial no. effective Mfr. code Mfr. part number IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300 1CH66 NE5532D 156–6706–00 IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300 1CH66 NE5532D A5U48 156–5888–01 IC,DIGITAL:HCTCMOS,MULTIVIBRATOR,DUAL NON–RETRIG MONOSTABLE,74HCT221,SO16.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A5U81 156–6713–00 A5U82 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,SW–REGULATOR,STEP–DOWN/BUCK,1 5V,500MA,4%,SHUTDOWN,LM2574M–15,SO14.300 27014 LM2574M–15 156–6714–00 IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,SW–REGULATOR,STEP–DOWN/BUCK,5. 0V,500MA,4%,SHUTDOWN,LM2574M–5.0,SO14.300 27014 LM2574M–5.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective A5A3 671–3873–00 B020100 A5A3CR1 152–0141–02 A5A3J1 131–2919–00 A5A3J2 Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DRIVER 80009 671–3873–00 DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST,40V,150MA,4NS,2PF,1N4152,DO–35 01295 1N4152R CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,RTANG,1 X 4,0.1 CTR,0.318 MLG X 0.110 TAIL,30 GOLD,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code A6C26 290–5035–01 CAP,FXD,ALUM:3.3UF,20%,50V,5.7MM(0.224) 62643 MVK50VC3R3MD60 TPX A6C27 290–0963–00 CAP,FXD,ALUM:220UF,20%,35WVDC,10 X 12MM,RADIAL 55680 UVX1V221MPA A6C28 290–5037–01 CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,35V,5.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6C57 283–5185–00 A6C58 A6C59 Name & description Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6C103 283–5004–00 A6C104 A6C105 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R 04222 12063C104KAT3A 283–5003–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R 04222 12065C103KAT060R 283–5003–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6C143 283–5003–00 A6C144 A6C145 Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R 04222 12065C103KAT060R 283–5003–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R 04222 12065C103KAT060R 283–5003–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R 04222 12065C103KAT060R A6C146 283–5003–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6C182 283–5003–00 A6C183 A6C184 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R 04222 12065C103KAT060R 283–5003–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R 04222 12065C103KAT060R 283–5003–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R 04222 12065C103KAT060R A6C185 283–5003–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6C220 283–5003–00 A6C221 A6C222 Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R 04222 12065C103KAT060R 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R 04222 12063C104KAT3A 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6C260 283–5003–00 A6C261 A6C262 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R 04222 12065C103KAT060R 283–5003–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R 04222 12065C103KAT060R 283–5003–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R 04222 12065C103KAT060R A6C263 283–5003–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code A6C309 283–5022–00 Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d A6FL12 119–4472–00 FILTER,RF:EMI/RFI,50V,500MA,0.12 OHMS MAX DCR,200 OHMS IMPEADANCE AT 20–300MHZ,4 COMMON MO TK2058 ZJY51R5–8PA A6FL13 119–3580–00 FILTER,EMI:T–CIRCUIT,140MHZ MAX,INS LOSS 15DB@30–800MHZ,25DB @70–200MHZ,1A,50V,1000PF,.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Name & description Mfr. part number *END MOUNTING PARTS* A6J4 131–5269–00 CONN,CIRC:PCB,MINI DIN,FEMALE,RTANG,6 POS,0.787 H X 0.137 TAIL,TIN OR SILVER,PNL MTG, TK0AY MD–S6350–N14S–1 4 A6J5 131–3926–00 CONN,DSUB:PCB,MALE,RTANG,9 POS,0.112 CTR,0.318 MLG X 0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6J34 131–1857–00 A6J36 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,STR,1 X 36,0.1 CTR,0.230 MLG X 0.100 TAIL,GOLD, 22526 65507–136 131–5670–00 CONN,HDI:PCB,MALE STR,4 X 35,140 POS,0.1 CTR,0.462 H X 0.177 TAIL,30 GXT, 22526 50015–5140A A6J40 131–1857–00 CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,STR,1 X 36,0.1 CTR,0.230 MLG X 0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6L15 108–1477–00 A6Q1 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number INDUCTOR,FXD:CUSTOM,SIGNAL,400NH,10%,IDC<17 A,RDC<0.3 OHM,Q>30@0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code A6R26 307–0828–00 RES NTWK,FXD,FI:4,33 OHM,2%,0.30W 50139 108B330 OR 708B330 A6R27 307–0445–00 RES,NTWK:THICK FILM,(9) 4.7K OHM,2%,0.2W EACH,TC=100 PPM,SIP10,PIN 1 COMMON 11236 750–101–R4.7 K TUBE PACKED A6R28 307–0828–00 RES NTWK,FXD,FI:4,33 OHM,2%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code A6R52 307–0828–00 RES NTWK,FXD,FI:4,33 OHM,2%,0.30W 50139 108B330 OR 708B330 A6R53 307–0828–00 RES NTWK,FXD,FI:4,33 OHM,2%,0.30W 50139 108B330 OR 708B330 A6R54 307–0828–00 RES NTWK,FXD,FI:4,33 OHM,2%,0.30W 50139 108B330 OR 708B330 A6R55 307–0828–00 RES NTWK,FXD,FI:4,33 OHM,2%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code A6R80 307–0828–00 RES NTWK,FXD,FI:4,33 OHM,2%,0.30W 50139 108B330 OR 708B330 A6R81 307–0828–00 RES NTWK,FXD,FI:4,33 OHM,2%,0.30W 50139 108B330 OR 708B330 A6R82 307–0828–00 RES NTWK,FXD,FI:4,33 OHM,2%,0.30W 50139 108B330 OR 708B330 A6R83 307–0828–00 RES NTWK,FXD,FI:4,33 OHM,2%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6R110 321–5019–00 A6R111 A6R112 Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.21K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK1211FT 321–5019–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.21K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK1211FT 321–5030–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK1002FT A6R113 321–5012–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,332 OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6R158 321–5018–00 A6R164 A6R165 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK1001FT 321–5043–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,47.5 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCD47R5FT 321–5043–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,47.5 OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6R203 321–5018–00 A6R204 A6R205 Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK1001FT 321–5043–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,47.5 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCD47R5FT 321–5050–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,33.2 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCD33R2FT A6R206 321–5043–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,47.5 OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6R244 321–5050–00 A6R245 A6R246 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:THICK FILM,33.2 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCD33R2FT 321–5050–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,33.2 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCD33R2FT 321–5050–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,33.2 OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Name & description Mfr. code A6R287 307–0828–00 RES NTWK,FXD,FI:4,33 OHM,2%,0.30W 50139 108B330 OR 708B330 A6R288 307–0828–00 RES NTWK,FXD,FI:4,33 OHM,2%,0.30W 50139 108B330 OR 708B330 A6R289 307–0828–00 RES NTWK,FXD,FI:4,33 OHM,2%,0.30W 50139 108B330 OR 708B330 A6R290 307–0828–00 RES NTWK,FXD,FI:4,33 OHM,2%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective A6R338 321–5051–00 B020100 A6R329 A6R330 Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD:THICK FILM,0 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCD0JUMPERT 321–5043–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,47.5 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCD47R5FT 321–5043–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,47.5 OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6S3 260–2174–00 A6TP1 Mfr. code Mfr. part number SWITCH,ROCKER:SPST,4 POS DIP,SIDE ACTUATED PIANO TYPE,UP IS OPEN,TOPSEALED,76PSB04S 81073 76PSB04S 214–4085–00 TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X 0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR 26364 TP104–01–02 A6TP2 214–4085–00 TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X 0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6U10 156–5055–00 A6U11 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,FLIP FLOP,DUAL D–TYPE,SET,CLEAR,74F74,SO14.150 01295 SN74F74D 156–5555–00 IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,TRANSCEIVER,OCTAL,PARITY CHECKER,3–STATE,74F657,SO24.300 04713 MC74F657ADW A6U12 156–5055–00 IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,FLIP FLOP,DUAL D–TYPE,SET,CLEAR,74F74,SO14.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6U31 156–6235–00 A6U32 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,BUFFER,HEX INVERT,OPEN–COLLECTOR,74F06,SO14.150 80009 156–6235–00 156–5052–00 IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,GATE,HEX INVERTER, 74F04,SO14.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6U49 156–6681–00 A6U50 A6U51 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,CLOCK FUNCTIONS,LOW SKEW PLL CLOCK DRIVER WITH PROCESSOR RESET, 70MHZ,MC8891 04713 MC88916DW70 156–5908–00 IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,FLIP FLOP,DUAL D–TYPE,METASTABLE IMMUNITY,74F5074,SO14.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6U71 156–5619–00 A6U72 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,REGISTER,8–BIT SIPO SHIFT,RESET,74F164,SO14.150 04713 MC74F164D 156–5055–00 IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,FLIP FLOP,DUAL D–TYPE,SET,CLEAR,74F74,SO14.150 01295 SN74F74D A6U73 156–5055–00 IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,FLIP FLOP,DUAL D–TYPE,SET,CLEAR,74F74,SO14.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6U97 156–5058–00 A6U98 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,TRANSCEIVER,OCTAL,3–STATE,74F245,SO20. 300 01295 SN74F245DW 156–5057–00 IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,BUFFER,OCTAL,3–STATE,74F244,SO20.300 01295 SN74F244DW A6U99 156–5057–00 IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,BUFFER,OCTAL,3–STATE,74F244,SO20.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6U119 156–6689–00 A6U120 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number IC,MEMORY:CMOS,VDRAM,256K X 8,80NS,DUAL PORTS,TC528257,SOJ40.400 0JR04 TC528257J–80 156–6689–00 IC,MEMORY:CMOS,VDRAM,256K X 8,80NS,DUAL PORTS,TC528257,SOJ40.400 0JR04 TC528257J–80 A6U121 156–5908–00 IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,FLIP FLOP,DUAL D–TYPE,METASTABLE IMMUNITY,74F5074,SO14.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A6U136 156–6550–00 A6Y1 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number IC,DIGITAL:FCTCMOS,TRANSCEIVER,OCTAL,RESISTOR TERMINATED OUTPUTS,3–STATE,74FCT2245T,QSOP20. 0TJ19 QS74FCT2245TQ 119–4640–00 OSCILLATOR:CRYSTAL CONTROLLED,25.175 MHZ,100PPM,TTL,F1100,4 PIN DIP,14 PIN COMPATIBLE 61429 F1100E 25.175MHZ A6Y2 119–1842–00 OSC,XTAL CLOCK:12MHZ,+/–0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A7C36 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R 04222 12063C104KAT3A A7C37 283–5003–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R 04222 12065C103KAT060R A7C38 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R 04222 12063C104KAT3A A7C39 283–5003–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A7C74 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R 04222 12063C104KAT3A A7C75 283–5003–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R 04222 12065C103KAT060R A7C76 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R 04222 12063C104KAT3A A7C77 283–5003–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A7C115 283–5025–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO 04222 12065A221JAT1A A7C116 283–5025–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO 04222 12065A221JAT1A A7C117 283–5025–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO 04222 12065A221JAT1A A7C121 283–1037–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A7DS2 150–1033–00 DIODE,OPTO:LED,AMBER,585NM,2MCD AT 10MA,HLMP–1401,T–1 01295 TIL212 A7F1 159–0194–00 FUSE,WIRE LEAD:5A,125V,0.125 SEC 61857 SP5–5A LEAD TAPE REEL A7J1 131–5630–00 CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,RTANG,2 X 20,0.05 X 0.1 CTR,0.326 H X 0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A7R8 321–5018–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 1.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK1001FT A7R9 321–5018–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 1.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK1001FT A7R10 321–5026–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 4.75K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK4751FT A7R11 321–5026–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 4.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A7R34 321–5020–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 1.5K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK1501FT A7R35 321–5020–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 1.5K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK1501FT A7R36 321–5026–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 4.75K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK4751FT A7R37 321–5026–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 4.75K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A7R57 321–5194–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 49.9 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 59124 RK73H2B49R9FT A7R58 321–5026–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 4.75K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK4751FT A7R59 321–5026–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 4.75K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A7R80 321–5194–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 49.9 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 59124 RK73H2B49R9FT A7R81 321–5194–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 49.9 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 59124 RK73H2B49R9FT A7R82 321–5026–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 4.75K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK4751FT A7R83 321–5026–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 4.75K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A7R103 307–5041–01 RES,NTWK,FXD,FI:15,4.7K OHM,2%,PIN 16 COMMON,0.08W EA,1.2W PKG,50PPM,SMD,SO16.200 57924 4816P–002–472 A7R104 307–5041–01 RES,NTWK,FXD,FI:15,4.7K OHM,2%,PIN 16 COMMON,0.08W EA,1.2W PKG,50PPM,SMD,SO16.200 57924 4816P–002–472 A7R105 307–5041–01 RES,NTWK,FXD,FI:15,4.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A7R126 321–5194–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 49.9 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 59124 RK73H2B49R9FT A7R127 321–5050–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 33.2 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCD33R2FT A7R128 321–5050–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 33.2 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCD33R2FT A7R129 321–5050–00 RES,FXD:THICKFILM, 33.2 OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A7U55 160–9896–00 IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD,EEPLD,MACH 210A,64 M/C,32 I/O,6 INPUTS,2 CLK INPUT,10NS,PRGM 156–6776–0 80009 160–9896–00 A7U56 160–9894–00 IC,DIGITAL:156–5925–00,22V10–15 TK0198 160989400 A7U57 156–6694–00 IC,DIGITAL:ABTCMOS,FLIP FLOP,16–BIT D–TYPE,3–STATE,74ABT16374,SSOP48.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list Component number Tektronix part number A9 671–2798–00 A9 671–2798–01 A9C2 290–5039–00 A9C3 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CIRCUIT BD ASSY:FRONT PANEL,389–1617–XX WIRED 80009 671–2798–00 CIRCUIT BD ASSY:FRONT PANEL,389–1617–XX WIRED 80009 671–2798–01 CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,6.3MM, SMD,16MM 62643 MVK50VC10RMF60T PX 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A9C28 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206, SMD,8MM 04222 12063C104KAT3A A9C30 283–5016–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1UF,10%,50V,X7R,0.225 X 0.250,2225, SMD,12MM 04222 22255C105KAT1A A9C31 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A9C62 283–5004–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A9CR1 152–5018–00 DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST,100V,0.74VF,4NS,2.0PF, SER–PAIR, MMBD1203,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM 07263 MMBD1203 A9CR2 152–5018–00 DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST,100V,0.74VF,4NS,2.0PF, SER–PAIR,MMBD1203,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM 07263 MMBD1203 A9CR3 152–5018–00 DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST,100V,0.74VF,4NS,2.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A9DS14 150–5008–00 DIODE,OPTO:LED,GRN,569NM,4.2MCD AT 10MA,28 DEG VIEW ANGL,YOKE LEAD BEND, HLMP–6505–021,12MM 50434 HLMP–6505–021 A9DS15 150–5008–00 DIODE,OPTO:LED,GRN,569NM,4.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A9DS100 150–5008–00 DIODE,OPTO:LED,GRN,569NM,4.2MCD AT 10MA,28 DEG VIEW ANGL,YOKE LEAD BEND,HLMP–6505–021,12MM 50434 HLMP–6505–021 A9DS101 150–5008–00 DIODE,OPTO:LED,GRN,569NM,4.2MCD AT 10MA,28 DEG VIEW ANGL,YOKE LEAD BEND,HLMP–6505–021,12MM 50434 HLMP–6505–021 A9DS102 150–5008–00 DIODE,OPTO:LED,GRN,569NM,4.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A9DS117 150–5008–00 DIODE,OPTO:LED,GRN,569NM,4.2MCD AT 10MA,28 DEG VIEW ANGL,YOKE LEAD BEND, HLMP–6505–021,12MM 50434 HLMP–6505–021 A9DS118 150–5008–00 DIODE,OPTO:LED,GRN,569NM,4.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A9R18 321–5000–00 RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,100V,1206, SMD,T&R 50139 BCD10R0FT A9R19 321–5028–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,6.81K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK6811FT A9R20 321–5028–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,6.81K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK6811FT A9R21 321–5028–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,6.81K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A9R72 321–5293–00 RES,FXD,FILM:30.1K OHM,1%,0.125W 91637 CRCW1206–3012F–R T1 A9R73 321–5293–00 RES,FXD,FILM:30.1K OHM,1%,0.125W 91637 CRCW1206–3012F–R T1 A9R106 321–5030–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK1002FT A9R107 321–5030–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A9R127 321–5030–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK1002FT A9R128 321–5030–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK1002FT A9R129 321–5030–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK1002FT A9R130 321–5030–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A9R152 321–5030–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK1002FT A9R153 321–5030–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 50139 BCK1002FT A9R154 321–5018–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A9R180 321–5348–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,76.8 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CRCW1206–76R8F–R T1 A9R181 321–5348–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,76.8 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CRCW1206–76R8F–R T1 A9R182 321–5348–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,76.8 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CRCW1206–76R8F–R T1 A9R183 321–5348–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,76.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A9R203 321–5348–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,76.8 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CRCW1206–76R8F–R T1 A9R204 321–5348–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,76.8 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CRCW1206–76R8F–R T1 A9R205 321–5348–00 RES,FXD:THICK FILM,76.8 OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A9U14 156–6228–01 IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,REGISTER,8–BIT PISO SHIFT,74HC166,SO16.150,16MM 01295 SN74HC166DR A9U15 156–6228–01 IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,REGISTER,8–BIT PISO SHIFT,74HC166,SO16.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A9U39 156–6228–01 IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,REGISTER,8–BIT PISO SHIFT,74HC166,SO16.150,16MM 01295 SN74HC166DR A9U40 156–6228–01 IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,REGISTER,8–BIT PISO SHIFT,74HC166,SO16.150,16MM 01295 SN74HC166DR A9U41 156–6228–01 IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,REGISTER,8–BIT PISO SHIFT,74HC166,SO16.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list Component number Tektronix part number Serial No. effective Serial No. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A10 672–0338–00 B010100 B010283 CIRCUITBD ASSY:MONITOR,671–2843–XX WIRED,AM700 80009 672–0338–00 B010284 A10 672–0338–01 B019999 CIRCUITBD ASSY:MONITOR,671–2843–XX WIRED,AM700 80009 672–0338–01 A10V1 154–0959–00 B019999 ELECTRON TUBE:CRT MONOCHROME/YOKE ASSY.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A10A1C29 Serial No. effective Serial No. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code 281–0772–00 B019999 Mfr. part number CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;4700PF,10%,100V,0.100 04222 SA101C472KAA A10A1C30 281–0765–00 A10A1C31 290–1303–00 B019999 CAP,FXD,CER DI:100PF,5%,100V 04222 SA102A101JAA B019999 CAP,FXD,ALUM:1000UF,20%,16V,ESR=0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A10A1L2 Serial No. effective Serial No. discont’d 108–0146–00 B019999 Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number INDUCTOR,FXD:SIGNAL;5.4UH,10%,ON FORM 307–0005–01 0JR03 108–0146–00 A10A1L3 108–2000–00 B019999 COIL,LINEARITY:FXD,NOM 13.O UH,8UH–50UH @–3.5 TO 3.5A 50783 933884401 A10A1L4 114–0471–00 B019999 COIL,RF:VAR 12 – 50 UH,W/LITZ WIRE,DCR 0.1OHM,I=0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A10A1R26 322–3177–00 A10A1R27 A10A1R28 Serial No. effective Serial No. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code B019999 Mfr. part number RES,FXD:METAL FILM;681 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CCF50–2G681R0F 307–0060–00 322–3066–00 B019999 RES,FXD,CMPSN:6.8 OHM,5%,0.5W 50139 EB68G5 B019999 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5 OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A10A1R64 Serial No. effective Serial No. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code 311–2266–00 B019999 RES,VAR,NONWW:TRMR,100K OHM,20%,0.5WLINEAR,MI TK2073 GF06VT2 104 M L A10A1R65 322–3402–00 B019999 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;150K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CCF50G15002F A10A1R66 322–3427–00 B019999 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;274K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list Component number Tektronix part number A11 671–2841–00 A11 671–2841–01 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d B019999 Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CIRCUIT BD ASSY:AM POWER SUPPLY 80009 671–2841–00 CIRCUIT BD ASSY:AM POWER SUPPLY 80009 671–2841–00 *ATTACHED PARTS* 211–0244–00 SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4–40 X 0.312,PNH,STL,CD PL,POZ TK0435 7772–312 211–0408–00 SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4–40 X 0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A11C12 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code 285–1196–00 CAP,FXD,PPR DI:0.01UF,20%,250V TK0515 PME 290 MB 5100 Mfr. part number A11C13 285–1196–00 CAP,FXD,PPR DI:0.01UF,20%,250V TK0515 PME 290 MB 5100 A11C14 285–1380–00 CAP,FXD,PLASTIC:2.2UF,400V,4A @ 100KHZSAF CONT TK1913 MKC4 2.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A11C61 283–0167–02 A11C61 281–0775–00 CAP,FXD,CER:MLC,0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170 X 0.100,AXIAL 04222 A11C62 281–0773–00 CAP,FXD,CER:MLC;0.01UF,10%,100V TK1743 CGB103KEX A11C63 281–0773–00 CAP,FXD,CER:MLC;0.01UF,10%,100V TK1743 CGB103KEX A11C64 281–0773–00 CAP,FXD,CER:MLC;0.01UF,10%,100V TK1743 CGB103KEX A11C65 281–0773–00 CAP,FXD,CER:MLC;0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A11C84 290–0946–00 B019999 CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:270UF,+100–10%,40V 0H1N5 CEUFM1G271 A11C84 290–1302–00 CAP,FXD,ALUM:1000UF,20%,35V,12.5 X 30MM(0.492 X 1.180),RADIAL,LOWIMP,1.95A RIPPLE,BULK 62643 CEEFM1V102M7 A11C85 283–0486–00 A11C86 283–0486–00 CAP,FXD,CER DI:1.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A11CR30 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number 152–1128–00 DIODE,RECT:SCHTKY;100V,10A,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective A11CR54 152–0601–01 B020100 A11DS1 150–0030–00 A11DS1 150–0050–00 A11DS2 150–1160–00 Serial no. discont’d B019999 B020100 Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number DIODE,RECT:ULTRA FAST,150V,25NS,35A IFSM,MUR120,T&R 12969 UES1103 LAMP,GLOW:60–90V MAX,0.6MA,A28–T,WIRE LEADS 0J9R2 NE–2B(AC/DC)R–T LAMP,GLOW:135V MAX,1.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A11J8 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number 131–5677–00 CONN,HDR PWR:PCB;MALE,RTANG,1 X 10,0.156 CTR 27264 26–65–5100 A11J9 131–5675–00 CONN,HDR PWR:PCB;MALE,RTANG,1 X 5,0.1 CTR 27264 26–65–5050 A11J10 131–5313–00 CONN,HDR PWR:PCB;MALE,STR,1 X 2,0.156 CTR 27264 26–61–4020 A11J11 131–4794–00 CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,STR,1 X 2,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A11Q6 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number 151–1282–00 TRANSISTOR,PWR:MOS,N–CH;500V,9.0A,0.4 OHM 66958 IRFP450FI 210–1178–00 WASHER,SHLDR:TRANSISTOR,TO–220,0.2”ODX0.116 13103 7721–7PPS 211–0410–00 SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4–40 X 0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d A11R13 322–3224–00 A11R14 311–2231–00 RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET;1K OHM,20%,0.5W,0.197 SQ TK2073 GF06UT2 102 M L A11R15 322–3226–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 91637 CCF501G22100F A11R16 322–3271–00 RES,FXD,FILM:6.49K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY 91637 CCF50–2–G–64900 A11R17 322–3299–00 RES,FXD,FILM:12.7K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A11R50 322–3485–07 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD,FILM:5K OHM,0.1%,0.2W,TC=T9,SMALL BODY 91637 CCF501C50000B A11R51 322–3306–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;15K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CCF50–2–G1502F A11R52 322–3139–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;274 OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A11R86 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number 322–3277–07 RES,FXD,FILM:7.5K OHM,0.1%,0.2W,TC=T9,SM BODY 80009 322327707 A11R87 322–3322–07 RES,FXD,FILM:22.1K OHM,0.1%,0.2W,TC=T9,SM BODY 91637 CCF501C22101B A11R88 322–3322–07 RES,FXD,FILM:22.1K OHM,0.1%,0.2W,TC=T9,SM BODY 91637 CCF501C22101B A11R89 322–3520–07 RES,FXD,FILM:9.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A11R117 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number 322–3193–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM 91637 CCF501G10000F A11R118 322–3255–00 RES,FXD,FILM:4.42K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY 91637 CCF501G44200F A11R119 322–3206–00 RES,FXD,FILM:1.37K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective A11R145 322–3318–00 B020100 A11R146 322–3210–00 A11R147 Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number RES,FXD,FILM:METAL FILM,20K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM,AXIAL,SMALLBODY 57668 CRB20T68EFX2002 B020100 RES,FXD:METAL FILM,1.5K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM,AXIAL,SMALL BODY 57668 CRB20 FXE 1K50 322–3085–00 B020100 RES,FXD,FILM:75 OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A11TP13 131–4751–00 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,STR,1 X 16,0.1 CTR,0.235 53387 2416–6132–TB A11TP14 131–4751–00 CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,STR,1 X 16,0.1 CTR,0.235 53387 2416–6132–TB A11TP15 131–4751–00 CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,STR,1 X 16,0.1 CTR,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A11U19 156–1126–00 A11U20 156–0312–00 A11U21 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,COMPTR;OPEN COLLECTOR,200NS 01295 LM311P B020100 IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,VOLTAGE REGULATOR,POSITIVE,15V,1.0A,4%,MC7815CT,TO–220 01295 UA7815CKC 156–2698–00 B020100 IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,VOLTAGE REGULATOR,POSITIVE,5.0V,1.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list Component number Tektronix part number A12 119–4547–01 A12 119–5413–01 8–168 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d B019999 B020100 Mfr. code Mfr. part number DISK DRIVE:FLOPPY,3.5 INCH,2MB,0.5 INCH,DSDD,BLACK BEZEL,FD–05 HF 50356 FD–05HF–BLACK DISK DRIVE:FLOPPY,3.5 INCH, 2M, 0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A13 671-3872-00 B020100 B020622 CIRCUITBD:LCD DRIVER 80009 671-3872-00 A13 671-3872-01 B020633 CIRCUITBD:LCD DRIVER 80009 671-3872-01 A13C1 281–0775–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170 X 0.100,AXIAL 04222 SA105E104MAA A13C2 281–0775–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code A13C23 290–0973–01 CAP,FXD,ALUM:100UF,20%,25VDC,8X11.5MM,0.2 LS,RADIAL,T&A 62643 SME35VB101M8X11 FT A13C24 281–0775–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170 X 0.100,AXIAL 04222 SA105E104MAA A13C25 281–0775–00 CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170 X 0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A13J8 131–3358–00 A13J23 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,RTANG,2 X 5,0.1 CTR,0.390 MLG X 0.112 TAIL,0.33 H,SHRD/4 SIDES,MIL PLZ 53387 2510–5002UB 131–4442–00 CONN,RCPT,ELEC:4 X 30,FEMALE,STRAIGHT,0.1 CTR 22526 50388–5120E A13L1 108–1570–00 INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER,10UH,20%,I<2.0A,RDC<0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A13R18 322–3085–07 RES,FXD:METAL FILM,75 OHM,0.1%,0.2W,TC=25 PPM,AXIAL,SMALLBODY 91637 CCF502–C75ROOB T A13R19 322–3135–00 RES,FXD,FILM:249 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0,MI,SMALLBODY 57668 CRB20 FXE 249E A13R20 322–3487–00 RES,FXD,FILM:500 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO 57668 RB20 FXE 499E A13R21 322–3193–00 RES,FXD:METAL FILM,1K OHM,1%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A13R44 131–4566–00 A13R45 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number BUS,CONDUCTOR:0 OHM,300 SPACING,SMBODY MI,DUMMY RES 91637 FRJ–50 322–3097–00 RES,FXD,FILM:100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM,AXIAL,SMALLBODY 57668 CRB20T68EFX1000 A13R46 307–0828–00 RES NTWK,FXD,FI:4,33 OHM,2%,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.) Component number Tektronix part number A13U10 156–4171–00 A13U11 Mfr. code Mfr. part number IC,CONVERTER:CMOS,A/D,8–BIT,30MSPS,2–STEP FLASH,215MW,TMC1175–30,DIP24.3 07933 TMC1175N2C30 156–4171–00 IC,CONVERTER:CMOS,A/D,8–BIT,30MSPS,2–STEP FLASH,215MW,TMC1175–30,DIP24.3 07933 TMC1175N2C30 A13U12 156–1704–00 IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,FLIP FLOP,OCTAL D–TYPE,3–STATE,74F374,DIP20.
Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable electrical parts list Component number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number A14 440–4145–00 B020100 B020692 DISPLAY ASSEMBLY:FLAT PANEL DISPLAY 80009 440–4145–00 657–0102–00 A14 657–0102–00 B020100 B020632 TOUCH PNL ASSY:TOUCH PANEL ASSEMBLY, AM700 80009 119–5428–00 B020100 B020632 DISPLAY MODULE:LCD,COLOR,640 X 480,6.4 DIAG,TFT,0.
Replaceable Electrical Parts 8–176 AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagrams This section provides detailed block diagrams of the circuit boards and the schematic circuit diagrams. Each module may have one or many schematic diagrams to illustration the complete circuitry of the module. Schematic diagrams are number by circuit board, beginning at diagram 1 for each module. Block Diagrams Each module in the instrument is assigned an assembly number (for example, A20). The assembly number appears on the block diagram. The overall block diagram is at the board level.
Diagrams Assembly Numbers Each assembly in the instrument is assigned an assembly number (e.g., A20). The assembly number appears on the diagram (in circuit board outline), circuit board illustration title, and lookup table for the schematic diagram. The Replaceable Electrical Parts List is arranged by assembly number in numerical sequence; the components are listed by component number. Example: Chassis–mounted components have no Assembly No. prefix.
Diagrams The detailed block diagrams are provided to assist in identifying the interaction between modules in troubleshooting to the module level. Use the exploded view diagrams in the Replaceable Parts List section to locate the modules installed in the AM700 Audio Measurement Set.
Diagrams 9–4 AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Digital Audio In Digital Digital audio Rear Panel Out In Out In Out In AES Ref Optical Unbal DSP Out A3 Sample CH A XLR Sample Analog Acquisition Audio In CH B DSP Remote A1 Analog Control Port 68040 Main mP CH A Audio Out DMA A7 Serializer Audio Generator COM 1 Serial Interface COM 2 CH B GPIB A5 A2 NVSIMM Boot Rom Front Panel Keyboard GPIB Host Interface PC Keyboard Interface Rear Panel Touch Panel 4–Wire Interface System Rom At Keyboard (optional) Dram Simm Flash Simm
J29 Generator Source Differential Input K26,K31 (K24,K30) CAL 1+ K20 (K10) + –12 K5 (K4) RF Reject 0 R321 (R320) Input Attenuator 100 W U3A (U1A) – K21 (K11) K22 (K12) –24 K2 (K1) XLR Input 150 Term –36 K23 (K13) K27B (K25B) K29 (K28) STAR Gain 0 or 18 dB Chassis CAL Circuitry OVLD Input 600 W and OVLD Sense 200 W gives 150 W Total Gain Set 0,+8,+12 dB Clamps to ± 10V COMP + U4 (U2) – U17,U20 (U5,U8) U114 TP8 (TP4) 2.
Bypass 20 K TP12 (TP11) To High Res A/D Circuitry 2.00 K 6,8 5,9 CH A Channel 1 Programmable Notch Filter Two Bands 750–20,200 Hz in 5 Hz Steps 20–750 Hz in 0.183 Hz Steps Q=2.
TP20 (TP22) A A/D+ (B A/D+) CH A is Left CH of A/D (Control Lines) 10 High Res A/D Circuit 3(26) Low Pass Filter 150 KHz, 3–Pole Bessel Minimal Phase Shift at 20KHz Unity Buffer U45A (U57A) 9 Single–Ended to Differential Converter High Resolution A/D 18 Bit ∆Σ (Dual) 4(25) U60A (U59A) TP19 (TP21) A A/D– (B A/D–) U60B (U59B) 13 A Ground Offset Trim DAC +15V Isolated for A/D –15V Input Clamps ± 4.2V R274 –5A1 U61,U62 TP36 Offset Trim DAC 12.
Test Enable LDS A1LDS DATA A1LDE _ L/R L R LDE High Resolution ADC CLK RDS ADC 1 Reformatter A1RDS RDE A1RDE LD U58 RD 2 Reset Test Clock 2 LD Test Pattern Generator RD LDATA A1RD BCLK L R RDATA High Bandwidth ADC CC ADC 2 Reformatter LDS 2 LDE CLK RDS 2 U67 A2LD SEL 4:2 Mux To U120 Sample Transmitter A1LD SEL 4:2 Mux A2RD RDE LD 7 RD 7 BCLK 14:7 Mux DATA _ L/R 4:1 Decimator CLK U75 ADC 3 Reformatter LDS LD LDE RD RDS BCLK RDE A2BCLK A2LDS A2LDE A2RDS A2RD
4 4 ADC 1 Encoder 4 A1LS (A1RS) 4 CH2 (CH1) Gain CH2 (CH1) Attenuator 4 ADC 2 Encoder 4 4 8:4 MUX 4 A2LS (A2RS) Sel 4 4 ADC 3 Encoder ADC Sel A Figure 9–6: Analog acquisition, part 2 of the data formatter PAL 9–10 Assembly Goes Here AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
TP30 5.0V Ref TP3 CAL SIG1 3V Ref 1,3,6,8 5.0V± 1% Voltage Reference CAL Select K6 Resets at GND K8B Cal A+ Chopper Switch VR9 3.0 U76 TP39 OSC K8C U78 Cal A– 2.5V Ref C26D, R255, R256 Set Frequency 120Hz 50.50 Duty Cycle Held Low when Disabled so Chopper Out – AGND 240Hz 555 Astable Oscillator U77 2.5V Ref 9 Oscillator Run 2 Latch Sine Wave Oscillator 0–50 KHz 7 Other Channel K7 $ 2.
From Power Supply 2 Floating Power Supply NOTE:Floating power supply is located on the power supply board in instruments with the flat panel LCD display. +5V Serial Control To CPU Host Bus DSP Section +5V Opto–Isolator U9,U10 Opto–Isolator U9,U10 SSI OVLD 12.
CERAM Address Address Decoder PAL Control RAM Data 12.
U24 drives U20 and U21 (Buffer)) though R30 – R33 (Values are Critical) From Digital Section TP32 B DAC 12.
”0”=High Band ”1”=Low Band MSB, U71, Switches Bands TP16 B BPF B (R Dac) Tuneable Bandpass Filter 2 Bands:20 hz to 750 hz 750 hz to 20 khz 6,8 Lowpass Filter 5–Pole Linear Phase 4,5 9,16 1,3,6,8 B High Resolution 4,5 U60 U13A,U44,U45 13 Select B BPF Bypass Frequency Select B BPF TP33 Lowpass Filter 80 khz 11–Pole Elliptic Hybrid +5 V1 ”0”=High Band ”1”=Low Band A High BW 47 nf B High Bandwidth FL1 Power–Up Reset To Gnd CR16 U99 ”0”=High Band ”1”=Low Band MSB, U64, Switches Bands TP15 A
0 or 6 dB Gain Hi BW/(Hi Res) 15,10 + U28B – Step Attenuator 6 dB/step 0 to –36 dB 1,3,6,8 4,5 B Hi Res B Hi BW 16,9 K9 2K Select A 42 dB Attenuator Ro=5W 0 –6 –12 U43 FL S2 2K S3 S4 Mono S8 1 of 8 Select R378 U55A Q29 – 42 CR5 Overload Monitor +22–22 Control FL 3 OVL D Output Ampl 4 –15 U55B, Q43 – 56 U81 – 83 R380 5W CR5 U54A 1,3 Select 6 9 8 U100 15 A 10 Out– K11B 70 295 Control Bits U11,U12, U32 – 35 48 To Digital Section through Opto–Isolators A Hi Res 16 A Hi
EPROM QADS[0 – 31] NVRAM Memory Controller, U34 EPROM,FEPROM and NVRAM U44, U53 Bus Buffers CPU To DSP DMA and Host Interface U80 – 83 Flash EPROM DB[0 – 31] Interrupt Register U64 U25 – 26 ADS[0 – 31] U65 5 Latch Control Signals Memory Controller U41 CPU and DSP Bus Interface 3 ILP0 – ILP2 FPD[0 – 7] FPD[0 – 7] QADS[0 – 31] Board Status Inputs Board Progam outputs 31 12 Board Status Register Bus Arbitration PALS Board Program Register Board Code Register 15 Interrupt Encoder Real
BA[0 – 31] DA[0 – 31] LADR[0 – 31] Port A ADRA[0 – 31] Port A Memory BD[0 – 31] Port B 3 B Memory Control RSTL 3 3 Bus Arbitration Control PAL IRQB 3 3 Digital Signal Processor 2 BD[0 – 31] Program Register 2 Port B Memory RSTL CHIP[0 – 7] DIC[0 – 31] Version PAL Status Register Serial Audio Data to Front Panel via CPU Board 5 IRQC IRQA 2 2 Interrupt Register DSP/CPU Interface ASIC Audio Serializer IRQB 4 CPU CK DSP Board Registers, Bus Arbitrator and Serializer Digital Data
A1A1 Analog Acquisition Board Component Locator (with cross-references to schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6) Comp No Bd Loc Comp No Diag No Diag Loc Bd Loc Comp No CR15 CR16 CR17 CR18 CR19 CR20 2 2 1 1 1 1 F2 F2 E1 E2 F2 E3 F2 E2 E5 F7 F7 E7 K4A K4B K4C K5A K5B K5C C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 Diag No 5 5 5 5 5 5 Diag Loc Bd Loc Comp No H3 C5 B2 H3 H3 H3 L6 N5 M5 K7 J6 J5 C210 C7 C8 C9 C18 C20 C21 5 5 5 2 2 2 H3 H3 H3 F1 D3 D1 K5 L6 L5 F1 B1 B1 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 2 2 2 2 2 2 D1 D
Static Sensitive Devices A1A1 Analog Acquisition Board See Maintenance Section AM700 A1A1 Analog Acquisition Board Locator Chart on front of this page. Use this chart to find components on A1A1 board schematic 1.
FL5 COM 1 3 C107 GOES ON CONNECTOR BD J2 CONNECTS TO J10 2 J2 1 2 3 4 1 FL4 HOT1 DS3 STAR input gnd CHANNEL A INPUT K5B 2 2 J1 TP51 R46 50.0K 6 K31B 2 A 3 R28 25.0K 4 J30 CONNECTS TO J14 J30 R321 1.00K 1 2 3 4 8 A A K31C A5 AUDIO GEN. BOARD GENSOURCEA 2 10 1 +5VD R297 20.5K ISOTERMA D2 COLL NC EMIT 4 A 32V FS 3 4 9 8 3 4 R307 249K CR18 CR19 +15V A R122 1.
Analog Acquisition Board Schematic Diagram <2> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A1A1. Partial Assembly A1A1 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
FL2 COM 1 3 C106 GOES ON CONNECTOR BD J1 CONNECTS TO J11 2 J1 FL1 1 2 3 4 1 HOT1 DS1 STAR input gnd CHANNEL B INPUT K4B 2 2 J1 TP48 R46 50.0K 6 K30B 2 A 3 R28 25.0K 4 J29 CONNECTS TO J14 J29 R320 1.00K 1 2 3 4 7 A A K30C A5 AUDIO GEN. BOARD GENSOURCEB 2 10 1 +5VD R291 20.5K ISOTERMB 3 D1 BASE D2 COLL NC EMIT 6 4 3 4 9 125 VRMS FS = 177V pk STAR input gnd 3 4 R304 249K CR14 CR15 +15V A R40 1.
Analog Acquisition Board Schematic Diagram <3> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A1A1. Partial Assembly A1A1 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6.
BNF[0..12] BNF[0..12] CHB NOTCH FREQ DATA E4 BNF12 6 15 9 U34C DG412-D 10 11 +15V -15V C307 0.1UF 8 U34D DG412-D 7 BNF0 BNF1 BNF2 BNF3 BNF4 BNF5 BNF6 BNF7 BNF8 BNF9 BNF10 BNF11 6 +15V C304 0.1UF C326 65PF C325 497PF R145 2.00K +15V C130 0.1UF R144 2.00K A R139 2.00K 2 A 8 4 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 17 1 3 for Q=2.
Analog Acquisition Board Schematic Diagram <4> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A1A1. Partial Assembly A1A1 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 5, and 6.
+5VD R221 10.0K +15V R225 3.16K R226 15.8K L1_OFST C206 0.1UF A CHA IS LEFT CH OF A/D 8 2 1 3 CHA_HIRES R222 499 -15V C205 0.1UF 5 A A CR26 7 CR27 R227 2.21K U45B LF412ACN 2 A CR25 C237 6800PF 3 R242 39.2 R220 15.8K C202 0.1UF A CHB IS RIGHT CH OF A/D 8 2 1 3 CHB_HIRES 3 -15V C201 0.1UF 6 5 A B1 +3V 5 4 23 22 8 9 14 15 C264 0.
Analog Acquisition Board Schematic Diagram <5> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A1A1. Partial Assembly A1A1 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6.
6 6 E3 6 4 C3 ADC_SELECT_A ADCSELA H4 3CLK H4 H4 H5 2IBCLK 3LRCLK 2CONVC H1 1DATA C3 0.1UF 1 2 13 14 15 16 27 28 7 22 8 21 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 17 18 19 20 23 24 25 26 IO0 IO1 IO2 IO3 IO4 IO5 IO6 IO7 IO8 IO9 IO10 IO11 IO12 IO13 IO14 IO15 I0 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 VCC VCC GND GND 49 50 53 55 56 58 59 61 62 64 65 67 68 70 71 73 74 76 77 79 80 82 84 85 A2LDE A2RDE A2LDS A2RDS TEST_CLK A2BCLK ADC1_L/(R) A1LD A1RD TEST_PATTERN1 TEST_PATTERN0 A1RDS A1LDS ADC1.1.START A1LDE A1RDE CHB_ATTEN[0..
Analog Acquisition Board Schematic Diagram <6> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A1A1. Partial Assembly A1A1 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.
C259 0.1UF TP30 U76 LT1021-5 2 +15V VIN 5 VOUT TRIM GND U78 DG403 15 TP31 6 16 1 4 4 3 A 5.0V .05% REFERENCE A CAL CHOPPER U78 IS SHOWN ACTUATED. PRECISION REFERENCE A R259 392 VR9 3.0V A3 C263 10UF 4 A A A +15V -15V A 9 8 5 6 11 14 12 13 R326 2.49K 6 U111B 74HCT14 C260 .1UF A C261 .
A2 XLR Board Static Sensitive Devices See Maintenance Section XLR Board Schematic Diagram <1> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram.
W13 COM 1 C13 0.1UF 2 A AUDIO INPUT 1 T2 J10 1 2 3 4 4 2 5 3 6 3 CH1 4 C11 100PF CH1 W14 + 1 T3 4 2 5 3 6 C12 100PF W15 - CH1 W16 COM 1 C16 0.
AM700
A3 Digital Audio Board Component Locator (with cross-references to schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12) Comp No Diag No Diag Loc Bd Loc Comp No C105 C106 C107 8 8 8 C108 C109 C110 C111 C112 C113 C1 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 1 12 12 12 12 12 B3 C4 C4 D4 D4 E4 I4 A5 A5 B5 A5 B5 C10 C11 C21 C23 C24 C25 12 12 6 4 4 4 E4 E3 E3 G3 F3 F3 C5 C5 F9 L9 M9 M9 C26 C27 C28 C29 C31 C32 4 4 4 4 4 4 G3 F3 F3 D3 F3 D3 K9 L9 L9 M8 L9 M8 C33 C34 C35 C37 C39 C40 5 5 5 5 5 5 E2 F2 G2 G2 D2 E2
Static Sensitive Devices See Maintenance Section A3 Digital Audio Board AM700 A3 Digital Audio Board Locator Chart on front of this page. Use this chart to find components on A3 board schematic 1.
J31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 HOST PORT J31 CONNECTS TO J53 11 A6 MAIN/CPU BOARD U99 QS74FCT245 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 D D D D B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 D A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 OE DIR D J1 H0 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 19 1 H0 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 HA0 HA1 HA2 HR/(W) HEN HREQ HACK HR/(W) D D 2 4 6 8 D D 11 13 15 17 D D D D D 1 19 D U100 QSFCT244 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2A1 2A2 2A3
Digital Audio Board Schematic Diagram <2> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A3. Partial Assembly A3 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 3, 4, 5. 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12.
F2 RXE020 .2A +12V F1 RXE020 .
Digital Audio Board Schematic Diagram <3> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A3. Partial Assembly A3 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 4, 5. 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12.
SAMPLE TRANSMITTER DATA FORMATTER PAL D[0..23] D[0..
Digital Audio Board Schematic Diagram <4> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A3. Partial Assembly A3 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12.
C268 510PF JITTER DAC +5VA A R244 3.09K 16 17 R245 3.83K JITTER0 JITTER1 JITTER2 JITTER3 JITTER4 JITTER5 JITTER6 JITTER7 JITTER8 JITTER9 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 U103 DAC-10 VREF+ IO VREF- IO B10(LSB) B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 VLC V+ COMP V- L14 2.2MH 4 2 R493 1.82K 1 A 15 C142 .01UF 3 C143 0.1UF JITTER[0..9] JITTER[0..9] C144 0.1UF 18 A3 -12V C269 510PF IN PLACE OF C145 +12V L19 2.
Digital Audio Board Schematic Diagram <5> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A3. Partial Assembly A3 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12.
A3 R417 121 (JITTER_INT) B2 R150 210 1 UNBAL_OUT 2 R461 4.32K B2 R256 100.0 JITTER[0..9] 4 4 8 C5 D2 D[0..23] D[0..23] 1 D9 JITTER7 JITTER5 JITTER4 JITTER1 JITTER0 D7 LEFT/(RIGHT) (DSPRST) JITTER6 JITTER2 2 4 1 4 9 F4 C2 F5 A4 F2 GENDATA JITTER_OFF (AES_OUT) JITTER9 D6 JITTER8 JITTER3 (ENCJIT_CE) C4 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 29 30 31 32 33 +12V JITTER_CLK D4 rp3 15 16 17 20 49 50 51 54 RED_BW_SEL 10 LOW-PASS FILTER C149 0.
Digital Audio Board Schematic Diagram <6> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A3. Partial Assembly A3 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12.
(UNBAL_EN) G4 FROM SERIAL CONTROL REGISTER (LOOPBK_EN) 10 (FP_EN) (OPTO_EN) +12V C56 0.1UF UNBAL_IN B2 2 R185 24.9 6 2 R188 200.0 A 8 7 3 U76 1 5 4 EL2120 A C57 0.1UF A -12V R186 681 R187 1.1K TP5 A A LOOPBK AGC H2 5 INPUT SELECTOR +5VA R173 10.0 C248 10UF 1 A 2 A H3 R177 6.98K XLR_IN+ 5 2 3 R179 46.4 H3 XLR_IN- R178 6.98K 15 A R170 511 C51 0.1UF 5 1 7 10 U74 8 4 LT1194 +12V -12V A A R181 10.0 3 3 R269 2.21K 14 2 8 7 R198 24.
Digital Audio Board Schematic Diagram <7> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A3. Partial Assembly A3 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12.
FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER 1 C171 0.1UF F COMPARATOR F2 OFFSET_IN 9 R292 121 R290 121 C167 0.1UF 1 R286 1.00M 2 4 10 B2 SCCLK D2 SCTD B2 D2 7 SYNTH_SDATA 5 8 TRI_SRD 6 (SYNTH1) U81 MC145170 OSC OSCOUT FIN CLK LD PD FV R DIN DOUT EN 9 FR V LD0 3 10 R421 20.0K 14 R422 20.0K 15 A C70 0.1UF +5VA 8 +12V VCO CR16 6 R213 5.00K 7 5 A R418 20.0K OFFSET1 C237 0.1UF R423 47.5K C236 270PF 3 16 12 G4 R447 2.
Digital Audio Board Schematic Diagram <8> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A3. Partial Assembly A3 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, and 12.
E3 REFCBL 9 FREQUENCY/PHASE COUNTER D2 E1 D[0..23] D[0..23] B2 H3 1 D8 MODE0 D1 D10 D7 D2 E5 PRD UP D9 MODE1 D3 D4 D5 D6 A[0..15] A[0..
Digital Audio Board Schematic Diagram <9> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A3. Partial Assembly A3 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, and 12.
MAIN DECODER 23 24 18 17 16 13 D G1 +5V ER_CLEAR ER_CLEAR 10 C174 0.1UF D IN_SOURCE 9 10 A H2 C242 0.1UF 11 20 R218 1.00K MAIN_RELOCK D A C131 .047UF Q21 7 22 8 21 +5V U86 CS8412-CP M0 M1 M2 M3 SEL CS12/FCK RXP RXN FILT INERF 10 R434 121 B2 C129 0.1UF 10 OFFSET_SEL1 G2 INMCK INCBL INWCK INBCK A REF INPUT SELECTOR R216 143 2 B2 D +5V U145 DG403 ER_CLEAR D 4 3 9 8 5 6 11 14 +12V -12V 23 24 18 17 16 13 9 10 20 10 AES_REF_IN- R219 1.
Digital Audio Board Schematic Diagram <10> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A3. Partial Assembly A3 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, and 12.
D[0..23] D[0..
Digital Audio Board Schematic Diagram <11> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A3. Partial Assembly A3 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 12.
C177 0.1UF 9 E1 INMCK 1 2 4 10 B2 SCCLK D2 SCTD B2 TRI_SRD 7 5 8 6 10 D2 (SYNTH3) U122 MC145170 OSC OSCOUT FIN CLK DIN DOUT EN FR LD PD FV R V REF VDD VSS R341 10.0K 9 R340 10.0K 11 10 R342 10.0K 14 6 +12V A +5VA C183 0.1UF R307 5.00K 1 3 A C184 2200PF A JITTER GAIN SELECTOR G4 (EJ_BW0) G4 (EJ_BW1) G3 (EJ_GAIN) 2 3 16 15 10 14 EJ_GAIN 6 13 4 5 R331 4.64K R329 1.82K R333 562 9 A A R328 332 50 kHz LPF C186 1000PF A R500 82.5 -12V 10 R325 8.
Digital Audio Board Schematic Diagram <12> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A3. Partial Assembly A3 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11.
R350 475 R353 475 R351 10.0 R352 392 C219 180PF C220 470PF A A VARIABLE GAIN PEAKING AMPLIFIER U132B AD602 R348 681 A R347 953 EQ_IN H3 C218 430PF 6 A C217 82PF A A 2 14 3 15 A A 13 12 1 C215 0.1UF 8 1 5 4 R358 392 U135 EL2120 R362 392 A +12V C208 0.1UF EQ OUT 4VP-P A R361 392 U133 EL2120 2 A 3 8 7 R386 33.2 6 TP19 EQ_OUT U134 1 5 4 EL2120 F3 A C205 0.1UF +5VA C216 0.1UF R357 232 -12V TP17 11 C207 0.
Static Sensitive Devices A4 Rear Panel Board See Maintenance Section Rear Panel Board Schematic Diagram <1> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram.
+5V L3 27UH +5V C1 0.1uF J6 3 1 2 4 OPTICAL IN 5 6 R2 511 1% GND R1 51.1 1% +5V GND L4 27UH GND J7 R3 8.25k 3 2 C2 0.1uF 1% GND 4 OPTICAL OUT 1 GND CHGND CHGND 1 CHGND C10 15pF C5 1uF R8 10.0 2 J4 AES REF OUT R9 10.0 3 4 3 T1 1 C13 33pF 4 C11 15pF CHGND C14 33pF CHGND CHGND C9 15pF C6 1uF CHGND R11 10.0 R10 10.
A5 Audio Generator Board (back) Static Sensitive Devices See Maintenance Section AM700 See back of A5 Audio Generator Board Component Locator Chart for front of A5 board.
A5 Audio Generator Board Component Locator (with cross-references to schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9) Comp No C1 C2 C3 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 C37 C38 C39 C40 C41 C42 C43 C44 C45 C46 C47 C48 C49 C50 C51 C52 C53 C54 C55 C56 C57 C58 C59 C60 C61 C62 C63 C64 C65 C66 C67 C68 C69 C70 C71 C72 C73 C74 C75 C76 C77 C78 C79 C80 C81 C82 C83 C99 C102 C103 C104 C105 C127 C129 Diag No 1 2 6 4 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 3
See back of previous page for back of A5 board. Audio Generator Bd. Sche- A5 Audio Generator Board Locator Chart on front of this page. matic Diagram <1> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Static Sensitive Devices See Maintenance Section Note: Parts for the floating power supply are omitted from this board for the Flat Panel Display version instruments.
D4 PB[0..14] PB[0..14] 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PB0 PB1 PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 PB10 PB11 PB12 PB13 PB14 DSP VCC VCC VCC R283 1.33k S1 1 8 2 7 3 6 4 5 VCC R284 1.33k VCC R285 1.33k R286 1.33k VCC R343 4.75K E1 DSPCLK 2 J4 CONNECTS TO J4 1 A3 DIGITAL AUDIO BOARD R107 10k J4 DSI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 VCC R108 DSO 10.0 DSCK R6 4.75K C1 4700pF VCC VCC VCC R280 10k DR PLL Locked (RST) R110 4.
Audio Generator Board Schematic Diagram <2> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A5 Partial Assembly A5 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9.
G2 1 D[0..23] D[0..
Audio Generator Board Schematic Diagram <3> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A5 Partial Assembly A5 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9.
ANALOG +/-5V FOR DAC U22 7805 +15V +5V1 C45 0.1uF C48 0.1uF DATA SHIFTER A A A A U40 74HC164P +5V1 A A C46 0.1uF 1 2 F_STD C47 0.
Audio Generator Board Schematic Diagram <4> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A5 Partial Assembly A5 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9.
A DAC HI-RES OUTPUT FILTER +15V C434 47pF H2 3 C329 1000pF R367 1.0k ADAC R172 1.13K R171 5.05K R159 1.0MEG R160 1.0MEG C338 1000pF 1% +15V A R173 2.37k 1 2 2 1 4 C337 1000pF 1% 8 11 C24 1000pF 1% A U46A 5532-SOIC 13 C340 0.1uF R175 2.37k A C25 1000pF 1% 8 11 R174 2.37k C382 * 3 9 18 +15V 3 +5V1 2 4 VCC GND GND RST CR16 1 A A C381 * FL1 80KHZ_LPF 3 9 18 +15V A 3 BDAC R366 1.0k R176 2.37k A A 8 -15V C341 0.1uF A 6 R346 47.
Audio Generator Board Schematic Diagram <5> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A5 Partial Assembly A5 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, and 9.
H4 1BP[0..12] 1BP[0..12] 2 U64C DG412-D 9 1BP12 10 U64B DG412-D 16 15 11 14 1BP12 U64D DG412-D 8 7 6 +15V -15V A TUNABLE BANDPASS FILTER 1BP0 1BP1 1BP2 1BP3 1BP4 1BP5 1BP6 1BP7 1BP8 1BP9 1BP10 1BP11 C326 65PF R145 2.00K C325 497PF +15V R144 2.00K 1 2 1 A A 17 13 2 C129 0.1uF 4 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 A U62 AD7541 B12(LSB) B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1(MSB) OUT1 OUT2 RFEEDBK 1 2 +15V C304 0.
Audio Generator Board Schematic Diagram <6> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A5 Partial Assembly A5 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, and 9.
H1 2 A–CH STEP ATTENUATOR CTRL[0..18] CTRL[0..18] 2 +5D1 CTRL0 CTRL1 1 16 15 A 4 5 6 7 12 11 10 9 R38 1.00K F3 +5V1 7 5 OVLD-A CTRL4 U95B 74HC02P 2 4 6 R76 500 1 U95A 4 74HC02P A CTRL17 CTRL18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 AGAINBOOST U75 MC1413 A 2 +5D1 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 9 8 CLAMP GND A A_HIBW (HIRES)/HIBW 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 A_HIRES 5 8 C52 47uF U100 DG403 15 H2 B1 BGAINBOOST 8 16 1 4 3 A CTRL2 +5D1 A +15V -15V 8 5 6 11 14 12 13 R63 2.
Audio Generator Board Schematic Diagram <7> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A5 Partial Assembly A5 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, and 9.
B2 K8A 10 AGAINBOOST 6 1 AMPLIFIER GAIN SELECTOR +5D1 R122 2.00K 7 K8C 8 9 A 4 K8B 3 R404 100 2 A CHANNEL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER C422 15pF R119 2.00K AMP1IN- AMP1OUT +22V R185 60.4 C350 2.2uF +22V R183 20.0K A H2 6 2 1 2 C348 0.1uF 13 1 AMP1IN+ C349 0.1uF C438 22pF A R186 1k R181 1k U49A 4 5532-SOIC C351 .01uF C345 0.1uF R325 16.2 R187 3.01k R326 16.2 R189 2k A Q3 C354 0.1uF Q12 C353 2.2uF -22V Q14 5 R193 2k -22V +5D1 1% .125W R103 95.
Audio Generator Board Schematic Diagram <8> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A5 Partial Assembly A5 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 9.
B2 K9A 10 BGAINBOOST 6 1 +5D1 AMPLIFIER GAIN SELECTOR R120 2.00K 7 K9C 8 9 A 4 K9B 3 R405 100 2 C420 15pF B CHANNEL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER R121 2.00K AMP3IN- AMP3OUT +22V POSITIVE AMPLIFIER +22V +22V +22V R226 20.0K A +15V H4 6 1 2 2 C372 0.1uF 13 1 AMP3IN+ C373 0.1uF U55A 5532-SOIC C447 22pF A R229 1k R224 1k 4 C375 .01uF C369 0.1uF R329 16.2 R230 3.01k R330 16.2 A C431 0.1uF C378 0.1uF Q31 A L3 10uH R362 10.0 Q36 C390 0.1uF -22V -22V C377 2.
Audio Generator Board Schematic Diagram <9> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A5 Partial Assembly A5 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.
+22V R400 0.0 E15 F15 FB F13 10 +22V1 +22V A C446 0.1uF AGND C395 1uF C394 100uF C456 100uF L11 10uH 3 <--- LEAD IS +15V TEST POINT TP17 +22V E13 R395 47 3W U81 LM2574-15 +22V1 R401 0.
A6 Main/CPU Board (back) Static Sensitive Devices See Maintenance Section See next page for A6 Main/CPU Board Component Locator Chart. See back of A6 Main/CPU Board Component Locator Chart for front of board.
A6 Main/CPU Board Component Locator (with cross-references to schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12) Comp No Diag No Diag Loc Bd Loc BT1 3 A5 A1 C1 C2 C3 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 C37 C38 C39 C40 C41 C42 C43 C44 C45 C46 C47 C48 C49 C50 C51 C52 C53 C54 C55 C56 C57 C58 C59 C60 C61 C62 C63 C64 C67 C68 C71 C72 C73 C74 C75 C76 C77 C78 C79 C80 C81 C82 C83 C84 C85 C86 C88 C89 C90 C92 3 10 3
Main/CPU Board Schematic Diagram <1> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A6 Partial Assembly A6 also shown on schematic diagrams 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12.
J36A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 +15V -15V +5V ADS0 ADS1 ADS2 ADS3 ADS4 ADS5 ADS6 ADS7 DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 J36 CONNECTS TO J300 RC14 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 ADS31 ADS30 ADS29 ADS28 ADS27 ADS26 ADS25 ADS24 ADS23 ADS22 ADS21 ADS20 ADS19 ADS18 ADS17 ADS16 RC15 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 +5V 1 1 1 2 1 0 1 0 1 1 2 1 0 1 0 +5V E3 +5V 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 +5V 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5
Main/CPU Board Schematic Diagram <2> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A6 Partial Assembly A6 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12.
PWR SUPPLY RESET PWRDY B5 12 3 +5V VCC 1 14 7 1 12 C301 220PF S1 OUT TT0 G3 TT1 3 4 C200 220PF QADS[0..31] QADS[0..31] R225 47.5 SYSTEM CLOCKS 8 DIF VALUE R167 475K C133 .1UF 4 8 +5V 13 3 R166 332 6 RST-IN Q0 SYNC Q1 PLL-EN Q2 MR Q3 RC1 2X-Q Q/2 RST-OUT C134 .
Main/CPU Board Schematic Diagram <3> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A6 Partial Assembly A6 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12.
BANK0 QADS[0..31] QADS[0..31] H3 +5V +5V +5V +5V 1 1 1 1 1 EPROM QADS2 QADS3 QADS4 QADS5 QADS6 QADS7 QADS8 QADS9 QADS10 QADS11 QADS12 QADS13 QADS14 QADS15 QADS16 QADS17 QADS18 QADS19 C3 QADS2 QADS3 QADS4 QADS5 QADS6 QADS7 QADS8 QADS9 QADS10 QADS11 QADS12 QADS13 QADS14 QADS15 QADS16 QADS17 QADS18 QADS19 5 VCC VPP GND GND CE OE R205 33.
Main/CPU Board Schematic Diagram <4> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A6 Partial Assembly A6 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12.
DA[0..10] R13 33 1 3 5 7 QADS[0..31] QADS[0..
Main/CPU Board Schematic Diagram <5> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A6 Partial Assembly A6 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12.
QADS[0..31] QADS[0..
Main/CPU Board Schematic Diagram <6> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A6 Partial Assembly A6 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12.
NVEN B4 5 E4 3 F5 4 CLR_PAR G3 4 NMICLR H5 5 RSTDSP B5 1 RSTOA A5 11 RSTOB G5 11 MNDIS F5 1 GPIBC D3 11 MIRQ1 H4 5 MIRQ2 F4 5 MIRQ3A F4 5 MIRQ3B F4 5 F3 5 RST_IC B3 1 MIRQ5A F5 5 MIRQ5B F4 5 MIRQ6A H4 5 MIRQ6B H4 5 MIRQ7A H5 5 RSTIO F3 12 B5 10 FEPEN BOARD CODE REGISTER BOARD STATUS REGISTER BOARD PROGRAM REGISTER ODEV B5 5 C3 5 D3 10 DB[0..31] DB[0..
Main/CPU Board Schematic Diagram <7> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A6 Partial Assembly A6 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12.
DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7 U94 74F245 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 G DIR DB8 DB9 DB10 DB11 DB12 DB13 DB14 DB15 U95 74F245 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 G DIR DB16 DB17 DB18 DB19 DB20 DB21 DB22 DB23 U96 74F245 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 G DIR DB24 DB25 DB26 DB27 DB28 DB29 DB30 DB31 U97 74F245 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
Main/CPU Board Schematic Diagram <8> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A6 Partial Assembly A6 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, and 12.
2 DB[0..31] DB[0..31] +5V SD[0..7] VA[0..8] QADS[0..31] QADS[0..31] H3 1 4 U27B 74F08 5 9 Y4 36MHZ 14 7 1 +5V 6 VCC GND NC 8 OUT C219 220PF U27C 74F08 R229 47.5 8 10 A4 +5V 14 7 1 PCLK Y1 25.175MHZ VCC GND NC OUT 8 1 +5V 9 U27A 74F08 PCLK 3 2 C235 220PF R232 47.
Main/CPU Board Schematic Diagram <9> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A6 Partial Assembly A6 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, and 12.
+5V 1 7 7 B1 G1 R62 10K FA[0..17] FA[0..17] FA0 FA1 FA2 FA3 FA4 FA5 FA6 FA7 FA8 FA9 FD[0..15] FD[0..15] U115B 74F04 7 B4 3 (DACK)1 4 C118 .1UF C17 10UF DB[0..31] DB[0..31] 4 18 E1 DB24 DB25 DB26 DB27 DB28 DB29 DB30 DB31 1 8 B4 B4 BRITE_(WR) BRITE_(CS) U115C 74F04 +15V +5VA +5V 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 16 15 6 QADS16 C53 .
Main/CPU Board Schematic Diagram <10> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A6 Partial Assembly A6 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, and 12.
P2 P1 OP2 OP0 TXDA QADS[0..31] QADS[0..31] H3 QADS2 QADS3 QADS4 QADS5 1 +5V +5V +5V +5V Y3 3.6864MHZ 14 7 1 VCC GND NC OUT U31A 74F06 8 1 J11 J14 R143 3.32K 2 IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 R142 3.
Main/CPU Board Schematic Diagram <11> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A6 Partial Assembly A6 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 12.
2 +5V 1 GPIB Controller DB[0..31] DB[0..31] E1 CK4-0 DB24 DB25 DB26 DB27 DB28 DB29 DB30 DB31 D3 1 2 +5V R129 10.0K +5V 20 R128 4.75K GPIBINT F5 RST25_2 RST25_2 BDIN D4 5 R185 33.2 E1 2 5 QADS4 QADS3 QADS2 3 2 10 43 21 6 9 8 7 28 40 QADS[0..31] QADS[0..31] 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 H3 GPIBCS B4 1 R219 33.
Main/CPU Board Schematic Diagram <12> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A6 Partial Assembly A6 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11.
+5V F1 1 1 IO BUS CONNECTOR ADS[0..31] ADS[0..32] RC6 DB[0..31] DB[0..31] ADS0 ADS1 ADS2 ADS3 ADS4 ADS5 ADS6 ADS7 E1 J22 1 C43 .01UF C44 .01UF C96 .01UF C99 .01UF J31 CONNECTS TO J8 1 A11 POWER SUPPLY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A11 POWER SUPPLY C78 .01UF C108 .01UF C109 .01UF C79 .01UF C110 .01UF C111 .01UF C84 .01UF C112 .01UF C85 .01UF C113 .01UF C92 .01UF C93 .01UF C114 .01UF C115 .01UF C124 .01UF C126 .01UF C127 .01UF C128 .01UF C130 .01UF C131 .01UF C142 .01UF C143 .
AM700
A7 DSP Board Component Locator Comp No C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 Diag No 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Diag Loc B4 B4 B4 B4 C4 C4 C4 C4 D4 D4 Bd Loc Comp No K6 I5 F5 C6 D3 C41 C42 C43 C44 C45 D3 C3 C3 I3 I2 C46 C47 C48 C49 C50 Diag No 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Diag Loc E5 F5 F5 F5 F5 G5 G5 G5 B5 B5 Bd Loc Comp No H1 L2 F3 K1 F1 C81 C82 C83 C84 C85 K1 D1 L1 E3 G1 C86 C87 C88 C89 C90 Diag No 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Diag Loc D5 D5 D5 E5 F5 F5 F5 F5 G5 G5 Bd Loc Comp No D5 D6 C6 C6 I1 C127 C128 C129 C130
Static Sensitive Devices See Maintenance Section A7 DSP Board (back) A7 DSP Board Locator Chart on front of this page.
J300A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B1 +15V -15V +5VIN +5VIN +5V J300 CONNECTS TO J36 1 A6 MAIN/CPU BOARD J300C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 ADS0 ADS1 ADS2 ADS3 +5V DATA BUS BUFFERS/LATCHES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 +5VIN ADS4 ADS5 ADS6 ADS7 SIZ0 SIZ1 TS TIP GWR DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7 CPUTA E1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 19 1 BG_CPU 2 TIP TS U36
DSP Board Schematic Diagram <2> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A7. Partial Assembly A7 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.
C2 SYSTEM RESET 1 DSPRST E5 G5 +5V 1 8 U18A 74F08 1 CPU_RST 2 RSTON 4 3 C3 1 U16B 0 74F5074 U18B 74F08 12 6 5 11 D P R CK C L 9 Q A5 1 8 RST40 8 Q RSTH 1 3 U17 DS1233SOT223 MASTER RESET S1 1 +5V VCC RST GND GND C104 470 PF +5V 3 +5V 2 4 D3 R147 CK40-0 DF2 R148 NOT INSTALLED R18 49.9 R149 F3 DF3 +5V CK40-3 R150 DSP CLOCK GENERATOR R140 U19 CY7B992PLCC DF0 +5V R141 DF2 DF3 +5V DF1 4 +5V 14 7 1 Y1 66.
DSP Board Schematic Diagram <3> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A7. Partial Assembly A7 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.
ANALOG FRONT END CONTROL PORT +5V +5V R108 4.75K +5V R109 4.75K +5V R110 4.75K DA[0..31] R111 4.
DSP Board Schematic Diagram <4> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A7. Partial Assembly A7 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, and 8.
PORT A MEMORY H2 B1 B1 3 8 7 BUS BUFFERS ADRA[0..31] LADR[0..31] ADRA[0..
DSP Board Schematic Diagram <5> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A7. Partial Assembly A7 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, and 8.
RC9 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 LDB15 LDB14 LDB13 LDB12 LDB11 LDB10 LDB9 LDB8 LDB7 LDB6 LDB5 LDB4 LDB3 LDB2 LDB1 LDB0 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 LDB31 LDB30 LDB29 LDB28 LDB27 LDB26 LDB25 LDB24 LDB23 LDB22 LDB21 LDB20 LDB19 LDB18 LDB17 LDB16 1 2 1 1 0 1 0 NOT INSTALLED RC10 PORT B MEMORY F2 LBA[0..31] E3 H1 1 8 LBA[0..31] 6 BUS BUFFERS 1 2 1 1 0 1 0 BA[0..31] BA[0..
DSP Board Schematic Diagram <6> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A7. Partial Assembly A7 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, and 8.
DSP - CPU INTERFACE ASIC H1 1 DIC[0..31] DIC[0..31] BD[0..31] G1 H2 5 8 BD[0..31] U15 ADG314-QFP 2 1 1 1 0 1 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 1 1 1 0 1 0 DIC0 DIC1 DIC2 DIC3 DIC4 DIC5 DIC6 DIC7 DIC8 DIC9 DIC10 DIC11 DIC12 DIC13 DIC14 DIC15 RC3 DIC16 DIC17 DIC18 DIC19 DIC20 DIC21 DIC22 DIC23 DIC24 DIC25 DIC26 DIC27 DIC28 DIC29 DIC30 DIC31 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 RC4 E4 1 CHIP_ADR[0..7] CHIP_ADR[0..7] E3 1 ASIC_BRTA C98 33PF R16 49.
DSP Board Schematic Diagram <7> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A7. Partial Assembly A7 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 8.
H5 BUS ARBITRATION CONTROL PAL D2 3 B4 F5 RXBG0 H5 F5 RXBG1 RXBR0 R135 49.9 R133 33.2 LADR30 R134 33.2 ABG 8 LADR27 LADR24 PCSW SCS PCS ANR ANR R131 33.2 C1 RXBR1 H5 E3 3 ATS LADR31 RST40-1 LADR26 RST40-1 ABB CK40-6 B4 1 3 C146 220PF LADR[0..31] LADR[0..
DSP Board Schematic Diagram <8> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A7. Partial Assembly A7 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7.
DSP +5V H2 A2 3 4 +5V 1 6 H1 H2 H5 3 4 7 D D D G K R R MG MH L 1 9 8 4 4 7 1 1 3 1 1 4 5 5 1 6 2 ADRA[0..31] ADRA[0..31] +5V 1 6 ADRA0 ADRA1 ADRA2 ADRA3 ADRA4 ADRA5 ADRA6 ADRA7 ADRA8 ADRA9 ADRA10 ADRA11 ADRA12 ADRA13 ADRA14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 R72 4.7K +5V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 +5V 1 6 AWR C115 220PF +5V E2 3 7 R51 49.9 R39 3.32K C116 220PF C2 3 7 +5V 1 6 C117 220PF R53 49.
AM700
A9 Front Panel Board Component Locator Comp No Diag No Diag Loc Bd Loc Comp No C77 C78 C79 C80 2 2 2 3 C81 C82 C83 C84 C85 C86 C87 C88 CR1 CR2 CR3 CR4 CR5 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 1 1 1 1 1 1 A4 B4 D5 D5 D5 D5 G4 G4 F3 E3 E3 E3 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 1 1 1 1 4 4 C5 C5 C5 C5 E5 F5 D3 C3 D1 G5 C2 C4 C14 C17 C18 C19 C21 C22 4 1 1 1 1 1 F5 A4 B4 B4 A4 F4 C4 E4 E5 E5 E5 F3 C23 C24 C26 C27 C28 C30 1 1 1 1 1 1 D2 E2 E5 E5 F5 E2 G2 G4 G3 G3 H3 H4 C31 C33 C34 C35 C36 C37 1 2 2 2 2 2 E5 C3 C3 C3 G2 G
A9 Front Panel Board (back) A9 Front Panel Board locator chart on front of this page. Static Sensitive Devices A9 Front Panel Board (front) See Maintenance Section Audio Generator Board Schematic Diagram <1> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A9 Partial Assembly A9 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, 3, and 4.
TOUCH PANEL X/Y READOUT SWITCHING +5A +5A R159 15.0K CR1 Q1 +5A R160 4.99K TOUCH PANEL REGISTERS BOTTOM C67 1000pF TOUCH PANEL MULTIPLEXER CR2 U29 74HC4053 +5A LEFT TOP TOP J4 J4 CONNECTS TO TOUCH PANEL C68 1000pF 1 2 3 4 12 13 2 1 R163 4.99K Q2 R55 1.00K CR3 6 11 10 9 X/(Y) +5A LEFT C69 1000pF X Y0 Y1 Y Z0 Z1 Z INH A B C VCC GND VEE DATA1 14 1 2 3 5 (CONVERT) 15 R5 1.00K 4 16 8 7 6 R8 1M +5A C23 0.01uF 7 +5A 20 9 +5A VI+ VI- NC NC AGND DGND VCC VREF R161 15.
Front Panel Board Schematic Diagram <2> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A9 Partial Assembly A9 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 3, and 4.
SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED IN CURĆ RENT FIRMWARE. 7 8 6 2 C56 3300pF 3 R42 301K AUDIO_R +5A C37 10uF R41 301K AUDIO_L 1 SPEAKER 1 +15V -15V DUAL A/D CONVERTER LATCH_L C4 1 DATA_L DATA_R LATCH_R DAC_CLK 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 19 U21 74HCT541 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 G1 G2 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 2 3 5 6 4 12 7 U19 AD1866 LL VOL DL VOR DR NRL LR NRR CLK VBL VBR AGND DGND VL VS VS R14 6.81K 14 10 13 11 16 8 1 9 15 R16 6.
Front Panel Board Schematic Diagram <3> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A9 Partial Assembly A9 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, and 4.
Menu +5V Rescale +5V R165 76.8 LED REGISTERS 1 H5 DATA3 C4 C5 (RESET) DATA_CLK C5 OUTPUT_LATCH 14 10 11 12 13 U34 74HC595 SER SRCLR SRCLK RCLK G QA QB QC QD QE QF QG QH QH +5V R166 76.8 Limits +5V R167 76.8 +5V R168 76.8 Freeze +5V R183 76.8 +5V R184 76.8 Filter +5V +5V R169 76.8 R170 76.8 Cursor +5V R185 76.8 +5V R186 76.8 Average +5V R171 76.8 +5V R172 76.8 Clear Menu +5V R187 76.8 +5V R188 76.8 +5V R173 76.8 R174 76.
Front Panel Board Schematic Diagram <4> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A9 Partial Assembly A9 also shown on schematic diagrams 1, 2, and 3.
S0 Menu C5 S1 Rescale +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V DATA4 S2 R106 10.0K Limits R107 10.0K R108 10.0K R109 10.0K R110 10.0K R111 10.0K R112 10.0K R113 10.0K 1 S3 2 3 4 5 10 11 12 14 Freeze S4 Filter DATA_CLK S5 (RESET) INPUT_LATCH Cursor 7 6 9 15 S25 Move/ Expand PUSH BUTTON REGISTERS 3 +5V +5V S26 U37 74HC166 A B C D E F G H R131 10.0K +5V R132 10.0K +5V R133 10.0K +5V R134 10.0K PUSH BUTTON REGISTERS +5V R135 10.0K R136 10.
Static Sensitive Devices See Maintenance Section A10A2 Transformer Board A10A1 Display Monitor Board Assembly A10A1 A10 Display Monitor Board Component Locator Chart and Schematic Diagram <1> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram.
+55V CR1 HEAT SINK R11 1K +12V C1 220UF C2 .1UF R1 562 U2 LT1086 L2 5.4UH R12 270 +5V C3 .1UF VR1 L1 1.8UH YEL 1 R9 3.32K 4 R6 1.00K R4 100 R3 121 Q2 WHITE LEVEL C4 1500PF Q1 TP3 GND 8 R8 5.1 1 1 R7 16.2 P3 +12V J3 J1 1 2 R19 2.74K 8 R16 392K 3 +5V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 -110V R13 1.00K 2 R14 1.00K 4 C5 .001UF U1 1391 MARK SP 6 VCC SYNC IN GND R32 10.0 +12V R22 20.0K R222 1.62K C9 .001UF C13 680PF C11 1UF T1 6 R24 470 C12 .047UF R27 6.8 2 Q4 C6 .
AM700
Use the A11 board table below for locating parts on A11 board schematic 1.
T1 FLAT PANEL DISPLAY VERSION Static Sensitive Devices See Maintenance Section A11 Power Supply Board For B020523 and above.
RT1 5 F1 L C3 S1 R3 1M INPUT RECTIFIER CR1 TP62 C6 .15UF RV1 1500PF R153 1.0 R7 10.00K A TP63 C4 N A C13 .01UF C11 .01UF C14 2.2UF C31 4.7UF U2 7812 6 11 5 4 12 13 3 R36 24 C32 4.7UF CR8 C15 470UF 8 CR25 1 TP5 C33 .01UF R39 .003 C3 +16.5VI CR27 L7 50UH C37 .001UF R42 100 TP26 2 +16.5VI C38 1000UF C39 1UF L8 50UH C41 1000UF C42 1UF J10 CONNECTS TO J1 +16.5V J10 C82 .47UF C40 .47UF TP27 A10A1 DISPLAY MONITOR BOARD 16V RET -16.5V CR29 T5 1 1 2 R41 .
AM700
+14.4V +16.5V +16.5V +14.4V R100 383k R97 19.1K +22F +14.4V CR39 8 3 +14.4V RT2 100K C68 .01UF U14A LM358 R101 9.31K 1 2 R102 20.0K R98 46.4K ALARM SENSING C69 .01UF +14.4V TP10 R99 28.7K R59 1.50K +14.4V R71 4.75K +14.4V +16.5 DS4 U9 SG3548N 11 R56 1.50K S1 R58 2.000K C57 .01UF 12 S3 VREF R62 5.000K R67 1.50K 10 G2 3 S4 LTH 16 DLY INV OUT R94 10.0K C60 .01UF 15 +5V 5 COL INV IN R64 6.81K TP11 LS 7 R90 9.35k C89 1UF U12A LM319 12 -14.
AM700
CR53 U20 7815 +22F J12 L14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10UH C103 1UF C97 .47UF 22RET C96 .47UF 22RET 22RET 22RET L13 10UH 22RET 22RET 22RET C101 .47UF C100 .47UF -22F 22RET L12 10UH U22 7915 C102 1UF CR54 22RET FLOATING POWER SUPPLY CR52 U21 MC7805ACT C99 .47UF 22RET C98 .47UF 22RET 22RET B020523 and above.
AM700
Use the A11 board table below for locating parts on A11 board schematic 1.
CRT DISPLAY VERSION Static Sensitive Devices See Maintenance Section A11 Power Supply Board For B019999 and below. A11 Board locator table on front of this page.
F1 6A FL1 A RT1 5 C1 1500pF S1 C3 .01uF R4 10 C6 0.15uF RV1 CR1 C4 .01uF C5 0.15uF C7 1000uF RV2 R7 10k R6 10M R5 100k C8 1000uF C13 .01uF C11 .01uF S2 LINE SELECTOR Q6 C31 4.7UF 7 4 3 9 10 1 R36 24 1 22 9 5 8 +15V CR9 R38 100 1 CR8 C32 4.7UF C17 47uF C16 470uF C18 47uF C34 250uF 5V RET +16.5VI CR27 L7 50uH C37 .001uF R42 100 CR5 F3 0.2A CR7 U3 7912 C38 270uF C39 1uF C41 270uF C42 1uF CR30 CR46 Q3 Q2 POWER SWITCH DRIVER 8 C20 3300pF R12 5.
Power Supply Board Schematic Diagram <2> Component Locator Chart The schematic diagram has an alphanumeric grid to assist in locating parts within that diagram. Assembly A11. Partial Assembly A11 also shown on schematic diagram 1.
+14.4V +16.5V +14.4V R100 383k +22V R97 19.1k TP13 R66 2.21k +14.4V CR39 +14.4V RT2 100k C68 .01uF U14A LM358 8 3 1 2 R102 20.0k R101 9.31k +22 R98 46.4k ALARM SENSING +16.5V TP10 +14.4V R71 4.75k +14.4V +16.5 DS4 +15V U9 SG3548N 11 R56 1.50k S1 R58 2.00k C57 .01uF 4 V C C 12 S3 VREF R62 5.00k S4 16 LTH DLY INV OUT 15 +5V TP11 5 COL INV IN R64 6.81k R60 402 3 C60 .01uF G2 R94 13.7k 1 1 U12B LM319 LS 7 R90 9.
P4 C1 CR10 TP1 C30 R18 R23 R28 C11 CR11 C26 TP4 P5 L3 CR12 C31 J8 R41 CR13 U11 C4 R24 TP8 R17 R22 R27 CR8 R39 TP3 CR4 C19 TP7 R47 R31 U6 C24 R50 U10 R7 U13 C32 C15 C3 C21 L2 CR7 R16 R21 R26 TP2 R37 CR6 C18 C33 U8 R46 U9 R36 R30 R13 R29 R6 U5 U1 C6 C2 U12 TP6 R1 C13 U3 L1 R49 P3 F2 C29 C27 Static Sensitive Devices See Maintenance Section C14 TP5 R38 R32 R14 C9 TP10 C10 CR9 R44 C28 P2 C8 C17 C22 C12 CR5 R8 R35 CR2 C16 C7 R48 R45 R33
LCD DISPLAY VERSION For B020523 and above.
AM700
Replaceable Mechanical Parts This section contains the list of the replaceable mechanical parts for the AM700 Audio Measurement Set. Use this part list and the drawings to identify and order replacement mechanical parts. The replaceable modules are included in this list as a convenience. See the Replaceable Electrical Parts list for the complete electrical component parts list. Parts Ordering Information Replacement parts are available through your local Tektronix field office or representative.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts Using the Replaceable Parts List The tabular information in the Replaceable Mechanical Parts List is arranged for quick retrieval. Understanding the structure and features of the list will help you find all of the information you need for ordering replacement parts. The following table describes the content of each column in the parts list.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts Manufacturers cross index Mfr. code Manufacturer Address City, state, zip code 00779 AMP INC.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts Manufacturers cross index (cont.) Mfr. code Manufacturer Address City, state, zip code S3109 FELLER U.S. CORPORATION 72 VERONICA AVE UNIT #4 SOMERSET, NJ 08873 S4091 SANYO DENKI C/O TJBO LIAISON M/S 78–210 BEAVERTON, OR 97077–7077 TK0435 LEWIS SCREW CO.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 10–5
Replaceable Mechanical Parts Replaceable Parts List Fig. & index number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Qty Mfr. code Name & description Mfr. part number Serial number B019999 and below only 1–1 200–4152–01 1 BEZEL,FRONT:POLYCARBONATE,TV GRAY,LEXAN920A 80009 200–4152–01 –2 657–0100–00 1 TOUCH PNL ASSY:TOUCH PANEL ASSEMBLY 80009 657–0100–00 –3 311–2509–00 2 ENCODER,OPTICAL:120CPR,SMOOTH,5V,TTL OUT,0.82 X 0.68,0.25 DIA SHAFT,0.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 10 17 13 12 11 16 15 14 Figure 10–1: Front view – SN B019999 and below only AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 10–7
Replaceable Mechanical Parts Fig. & index number Tektronix part number 2–1 174–3609–00 1 –2 174–3166–00 –3 –4 Serial no. effective Serial no. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number CABLE ASSY,SP:DISCRETE,LDI,16,26 AWG,1X8,0.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts 1 16 15 14 13 3 4 5 2 6 7 12 8 11 10 9 Figure 10–2: Front view – SN B020100 and above only AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 10–9
Replaceable Mechanical Parts Fig. & index number Tektronix part number Serial no. effective Serial No. discont’d Qty 3–1 671–2666–00 B010100 B010324 1 671–2666–01 B010325 B010348 671–2666–02 B010349 Name & description Mfr. code Mfr. part number 80009 671–2666–00 Serial number B019999 and below only CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU, (A6) 1 CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU, (A6) 80009 671–2666–01 1 CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU, (A6) 80009 671–2666–02 –2 146–0116–00 1 BATTERY, DRY:3.0V,850MAH,LITHIUM,0.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 9 10 15 11 12 13 32 14 31 15 16 30 15 29 17 28 15 27 18 19 20 21 26 25 22 15 24 23 Figure 10–3: Top view – SN B019999 and below only AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 10–11
Replaceable Mechanical Parts 10–12 AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Mechanical Parts Fig. & Index Number Tektronix Part Number 4–1 671–2666–03 1 –2 146–0116–00 –3 Serial No. Effective Serial No. Discont’d Mfr. Code Mfr. Part Number CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU, (A6) 80009 671–2666–03 1 BATTERY, DRY:3.0V,850MAH,LITHIUM,0.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts Fig. & Index Number Tektronix Part Number 4–23 174–3154–01 1 –24 174–3164–01 –25 –26 Serial No. Effective Serial No. Discont’d Mfr. Code Mfr.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts 6 2 3 4 7 5 8 9 1 10 16 11 12 13 35 14 34 15 33 16 17 32 16 31 18 30 16 19 20 21 22 29 28 26 25 24 23 16 27 Figure 10–4: Top view – SN B020100 and above only AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 10–15
Replaceable Mechanical Parts Fig. & index number Tektronix part number 5–1 671–2916–00 1 –2 131–4046–00 –3 Serial no. effective Serial No. discont’d Mfr. code Mfr. part number CIRCUIT BD ASSY:REAR PANEL (A4) 80009 671–2916–00 1 CONN,DSUB:PCB/PNL,FEMALE,RTANG,15 POS,0.318 MLG X 0.125 TAIL,4–40 THD INSERTS,BD RETENTIO 00779 747845–4 131–0955–00 2 CONN,RF JACK:BNC,50 OHM,FEMALE,STR,SLDR CUP/FRONT PNL,GOLD,0.520 MLG X 0.490 TAIL,0.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts 5 3 6 8 9 7 4 10 3 2 1 11 12 23 13 22 21 7 9 20 8 14 19 15 18 7 16 17 7 Figure 10–5: Left side view CRT Display version – SN B019999 and below only AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 10–17
Replaceable Mechanical Parts Fig. & Index Number Tektronix Part Number 6–1 671–2916–00 1 –2 131–4046–00 –3 Serial No. Effective Serial No. Discont’d Mfr. Code Mfr. Part Number CIRCUIT BD ASSY:REAR PANEL (A4) 80009 671–2916–00 1 CONN,DSUB:PCB/PNL,FEMALE,RTANG,15 POS,0.318 MLG X 0.125 TAIL,4–40 THD INSERTS,BD RETENTIO 00779 747845–4 131–0955–00 2 CONN,RF JACK:BNC,50 OHM,FEMALE,STR,SLDR CUP/FRONT PNL,GOLD,0.520 MLG X 0.490 TAIL,0.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts 5 3 6 4 28 8 9 7 10 3 27 26 25 2 24 1 7 11 12 23 13 8 9 14 22 21 20 18 19 15 18 17 16 7 Figure 10–6: Left side view LCD Display version – SN B020100 and above only AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 10–19
Replaceable Mechanical Parts Fig. & index number Tektronix part number 7–1 657–0102–01 1 TOUCH PNL ASSY:TOUCH PANEL ASSEMBLY –2 348–1466–00 1 SHIELD,GKT,ELEC:CLIP–ON,2.8 L,BECU,EMI 30817 0493–0087–00 –3 348–1533–00 1 GASKET,LCD:LCD GASKET,3.9 X 5.25 INSIDE 5.0 X 6.25 OUTSIDE,0.063 THK,PRESSURE SENSITIVE AD 80009 348–1533–00 –4 119–5633–00 1 DISPLAY MODULE:LCD,COLOR,6.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts Serial number B020633 and above only 8 4 9 7 3 2 6 1 5 10 11 12 Display Assembly Tektronix part number 440–4145–01 Serial number B020100 to B020632 only 20 15 14 13 21 19 16 18 17 22 23 24 Display Assembly Tektronix part number 440–4145–00 Figure 10–7: LCD display assembly subparts – SN B020100 and above AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 10–21
Replaceable Mechanical Parts Fig. & Index Number Tektronix Part Number 8–1 348–0763–00 2 –2 134–0245–00 –3 386–6579–00 –4 Serial No. Effective Serial No. Discont’d Mfr. Code Mfr. Part Number GROMMET,PLASTIC:NATURAL,OVAL,1.235 ID 0JR05 ORDER BY DESCR 1 PLUG,BUTTON:0.156 THK X 0.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts 2 3 1 4 22 21 20 19 5 6 17 6 16 18 17 7 16 4 13 8 9 15 10 11 15 14 13 12 Figure 10–8: Chassis and bottom view – SN B019999 and below only AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 10–23
Replaceable Mechanical Parts Fig. & Index Number Tektronix Part Number 9– 441–2053–02 1 –1 333–4108–02 –2 134–0245–00 –3 386–6579–00 Serial No. Effective Serial No. Discont’d Mfr. Code Mfr. Part Number CHASSIS ASSY:CHASSIS ASSEMBLY WHOLE 80009 441–2053–02 1 PANEL,REAR:CHASSIS REAR PANEL,ALUM 80009 333–4108–02 1 PLUG,BUTTON:0.156 THK X 0.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts 1 2 3 27 4 5 26 25 5 6 7 24 5 5 8 23 22 4 9 21 20 19 20 19 10 18 11 17 16 15 14 13 5 12 6 Figure 10–9: Chassis and bottom view – SN B020100 and above only AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 10–25
Replaceable Mechanical Parts Fig. & Index Number Tektronix Part Number 9–1 Qty Name & Description Mfr. Code Mfr. Part Number 200–4211–00 1 COVER:PROTECTIVE,0.125 ABS,BLACK 80009 200–4211–00 –2 390–1132–00 1 CAB,WRAPAROUND: 80009 390–1132–00 –3 348–1154–01 4 FOOT,CABINET:POLYCARBONATE 80009 348–1154–01 –4 211–0511–00 4 SCREW,MACHINE:6–32 X 0.5,PNH,STL CD PL, POZ TK0435 ORDER BY DESCR 10–26 Serial No. Effective Serial No.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts 4 3 2 1 Figure 10–10: Cabinet AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 10–27
Replaceable Mechanical Parts Fig. & Index Number Tektronix Part Number Serial No. Effective Serial No. Discont’d Qty 10 –1 Mfr. Code Name & Description Mfr.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts 2 1 3 5 4 Figure 10–11: Standard and optional accessories AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual 10–29
Replaceable Mechanical Parts 10–30 AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Appendix
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping These tables can be used for troubleshooting of the digital components if you have access to a logic analyzer and are experienced in its use for troubleshooting. Normally, attempting to troubleshoot to this level requires a good deal of experience with the circuitry of the AM700 and would not be done by a customer.
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping Table A-2: System memory map summary (host CPU side) (cont.
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping Table A-3: CPU/DSP interface address map (cont.
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping Table A-6: Mapping access by the MC68040 TEK 2 MB SIMM Address(hex) Memory bank 2 MB SIMM Size 2000 0000 – 200F FFFF 0 SIMM0 1 MB 2010 0000 – 201F FFFF 1 SIMM0 1 MB 2020 0000 – 202F FFFF 2 SIMM1 1 MB 2030 0000 – 203F FFFF 3 SIMM1 1 MB 2000 0000 – 203F FFFF 0 SIMM0 4 MB 2040 0000 – 207F FFFF 1 SIMM0 4 MB 2080 0000 – 20BF FFFF 2 SIMM1 4 MB 20C0 0000 – 20FF FFFF 3 SIMM1 4 MB TEK 8 MB SIMM Table A-7: Flash SIMM module capacity identif
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping Table A-9: DRAM address map (96002 DMA access) Address(hex) Size BSR6 BSR5 BSR4 CC00 0000 – CC0F FFFF 4 MB 0 0 0 CC00 0000 – CC1F FFFF 8 MB 0 1 1 CC00 0000 – CCFF FFFF 16 MB 0 1 0 1 Diagnostic LED Displays BSR6 = Board Status Register bit 6 BSR5 = Board Status Register bit 5 BSR4 = Board Status Register bit 4 If BSR6=BSR5=BSR4=1, it means no DRAM installed.
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping Table A-11: Dip switch S3 functional specification DIP SWITCH S3 Switch position Descriptions 1 UP DOWN Normal System Operation Disable 30 mS Timer 2 UP DOWN Normal System Operation Cache disabled 3 UP DOWN Normal System Operation Reset CPU only 4 UP DOWN Normal System Operation Reset ALL hardware except CPU Table A-12: CPU MC68040 interrupts priority table Interrupt level Interrupt source BPR interrupt mask bit 7 NVRAM Battery Failure B20 6 a.
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping Table A-13: Board status register address: 12000000 Operation: read only (cont.
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping Table A-14: Board program register address: 13000000 (cont.
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping Table A-14: Board program register address: 13000000 (cont.
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping Table A-15: Timer registers and addresses Timer register Address Timer register Address Timer register Address 0 17000000 18 17000060 31 170000C0 1 17000004 19 17000064 32 170000C4 2 17000008 1A 17000068 33 170000C8 3 1700000C 1B 1700006C 34 170000CC 4 17000010 1C 17000070 35 170000D0 5 17000014 1D 17000074 36 170000D4 6 17000018 1E 17000078 37 170000D8 7 1700001C 1F 1700007C 38 170000DC 8 17000020 20 17000080
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping Table A-16: Interrupt inputs and sources (cont.) Interrupt input Type of interrupt Interrupt source level Sample Receiver 0 Interrupt level Sample Receiver 1 Interrupt The following additional tables are for use in mapping the DUARTs and other port interfaces. The DUARTA and DUARTB register addresses are given in Tables A-17 and A-18.
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping Table A-18: DUARTB register addresses Register address Read Write $11000000 Mode Register A (MR1A, MR2A) Mode Register A (MR1A, MR2A) $11000004 Status Register A (SRA) Clock Select Register A (CSRA) $11000008 Do Not Access Command Register A (CRA) $1100000C Receiver Buffer A (RBA) Transmitter Buffer A (TBA) $11000010 Input Port Change Register (IPCR) Auxiliary Control Register (ACR) $11000014 Interrupt Status Register (ISR) Interrupt Mask Register
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping Table A-20: GPIB controller read registers Address (hex) Register name 1600 0000 Int Status 0 1600 0004 Int Status 1 1600 0008 Address Status 1600 000C Bus Status 1600 0010 * 1600 0014 * 1600 0018 Cmd Pass Thru 1600 001C Data In * The TMS9914A host interface data lines will remain in the high impedance state when these register locations are addressed.
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping Table A-23: Port B memory map summary (DSP side) Address (hex) Type Description a. CC00 0000 – CC0F FFFF b. CC00 0000 – CC1F FFFF R/W DMA access DRAM a. 1fff 0000 – 2000 FFFF b. 1ffd 0000 – 2000 FFFF R/W SRAM $5000 0000 W DMA Process Reset Register (PRR) 4MB 8 MB 128k × 32 256k × 32 Table A-24: AHR address (CPU side): $1900 0000 AHR bit assignment Type Default value (in hex) Description 31 .. 28 R 0 ASIC version number 27 ..
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping Table A-25: Status register (SR), U52 and U53, address: $4000 0000 (cont.
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping Table A-27: SMOD1 and SMOD0 bit settings (Cont.) SMOD2 SMOD1 SMOD0 Description 0 1 0 Generate 8 kHz clock X1 1 1 hold 1 X = don’t care. Table A-28: Host interface bootstrap operating mode Mode MC MB MA DSP initial chip operating mode 7 1 1 1 Bootstrap through the Host Interface (Port B) NOTE. Refer to DSP Manufacture’s User Manual for detailed description of the Bootstrap Operating Mode.
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping 3. DMA Read Access: SSA2 → SSW1 DMA Write Access: DSA1 ← SSW1 a. generated DMA Trigger (IRQB) 4. DMA Read Access: SSA3 → SSW2 DMA Write Access: DSA2 ← SSW2 a. generated DMA Trigger (IRQB) 5. DMA Read Access: SSA4 → SSW3 DMA Write Access: DSA3 ← SSW3 a. DMA Interface (DI) stored the SSA4 and generated bus request (DMABR) b. Wait for Bus Grant (DMABG) c. If DMABG asserted, store 4 long words into DMA READ buffer d. generated DMA Trigger (IRQB) 6.
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping DMA WRITE Procedure This explanation assumes a transfer of eight words from DSP local memory address AS0 to shared memory address AD0 Count # = # of word transfer – 1 DSP instruction access address = AD0 DMA Source address = AS0+1 DMA Destination address = AD0+1 * # of word(s) transfer must be equal to factor of four words. 1. DSP Write Access: Address:Destination Start Address(DSA0) DSA0 → DSW0 a. DMA Interface(DI) stored the DSA0 in address buffer b.
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping 6. DMA Write Access: DSA5 → DSW5 a. DI stored DSW5 DMA WRITE BUFFER b. generated DMA Trigger (IRQB) 7. DMA Write Access: DSA6 → DSW6 a. DI stored DSW6 DMA WRITE BUFFER b. generated DMA Trigger (IRQB) 8. DMA Write Access: DSA7 → DSW7 a. DI stored DSW7 DMA WRITE BUFFER b. generated DMABR c. If DMABG asserted, write 4 long words to DRAM d. generated DMA Trigger (IRQB) 9. DSP Write to DMA Reset Register (DRR) to stop the process. NOTE.
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping Table A-29: DMA interface address translation DSP 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Host xa x 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 DSP 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Host 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 DSP *b * Host 1 0 a b X = don’t care * = ground Translation Examples Table A-30: Host/DMA address translation examples DSP Address Host Address CC00 0000
